SPT 1700 Series
Product Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series
Product Reference Guide
70-37544-03
Revision A
December 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1999-2000 by Symbol Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or
mechanical means, without permission in writing from Symbol. This includes electronic or
mechanical means, such as photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval
systems. The material in this manual is subject to change without notice.
The software is provided strictly on an “as is” basis. All software, including firmware,
furnished to the user is on a licensed basis. Symbol grants to the user a non-transferable
and non-exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder
(licensed program). Except as noted below, such license may not be assigned,
sublicensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Symbol.
No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under
copyright law. The user shall not modify, merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a
licensed program with other program material, create a derivative work from a licensed
program, or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Symbol.
The user agrees to maintain Symbol’s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered
hereunder, and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in whole or in part.
The user agrees not to decompile, disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed
program delivered to the user or any portion thereof.
Symbol reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability,
function, or design.
Symbol does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the
application or use of any product, circuit, or application described herein.
No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any
Symbol Technologies, Inc., intellectual property rights. An implied license only exists for
equipment, circuits, and subsystems contained in Symbol products.
Symbol and the Symbol logo are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies, Inc. Other
product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged.
Symbol Technologies, Inc.
One Symbol Plaza
Holtsville, New York 11742-1300
http://www.symbol.com
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Chapter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Notational Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Symbol Support Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Warranty Coverage and Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Chapter 1. Getting Started with the SPT 1700
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Unpacking the Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Parts of the SPT 1700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Getting Started with the SPT 1700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Setting Up the Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Installing the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Charging the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Attaching the Handstrap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Starting the SPT 1700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Configuring the Spectrum24 Network (SPT 174x only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Configuring the Wide Area Network (SPT 173x only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Using the SPT 1700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Using the Power Button/Backlight Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Using the Contrast Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Writing with the Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Using the Onscreen Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Icon Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Chapter 2. Network Setup
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Configuring a Spectrum24 Connection (SPT 174x Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Configuring a CDPD WAN Connection (SPT 1733 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Maintenance Screens and Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Merlin Menu Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Merlin Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Advanced Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Configuring a GSM WAN Connection (SPT 1734 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Chapter 3. Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Writing Graffiti with the Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Writing Numbers With Graffiti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Graffiti ShortCuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Using the On-Screen Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Using Application Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Using Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Choosing a Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Graffiti Menu Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Edit Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Choosing Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Using Categories in Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Defining a New Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Renaming Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Attaching Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Marking Private Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Beaming Information to Other SPT 1700 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Scanning with the SPT 1700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Using the Find Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Using Phone Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Phone Lookup Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Chapter 5. Applications: Address Book
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Opening the Address Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Address Book Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Creating an Address Book Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Deleting an Address Book Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Duplicating an Address Book Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Working with Address Book Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Beaming Address Entries to Other SPT 1700 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Address Book Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Record Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Chapter 6. Applications: Calculator
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Opening the Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Using the Calculator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Special Calculator Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Calculator Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Recent Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. Applications: Date Book
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Using the Date Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Deleting an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Working in Week View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Chapter 8. Applications: Expense
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Entering Receipt Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Show Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Transferring Your Data to Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Printing an Expense Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Viewing your Expense Report in Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Using Expense Report Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Chapter 9. Applications: HotSync®
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
The HotSync Process and the HotSync Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Performing a HotSync Operation for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Using User Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Using File Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Conducting a Local HotSync Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Selecting HotSync Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Customizing HotSync Application Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Conducting a HotSync Operation via Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Preparing Your Computer for a Modem HotSync Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Preparing Your SPT 1700 Terminal for a Modem HotSync Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Selecting the Conduits for a Modem HotSync Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Performing a HotSync Operation via Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Conducting Wireless HotSync Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Setting Up for a Wireless HotSync. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Performing a Spectrum24 HotSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Performing a CDPD HotSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Performing a GSM HotSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Setting Up the Ethernet Cradle for HotSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Installing NetSync. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Creating a CRD1700-4000E Modem Sync Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Configuring the Remote Host PC for Use with the Ethernet Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
The Ethernet HotSync Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Overview of the ScoutSync Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Configuring the ScoutSync Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Selecting Conduits for Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Performing a Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Automatically Synchronizing Using a Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Viewing the Synchronization Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
ScoutSync Client Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
AvantGo Client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Navigating in AvantGo Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Icon Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Using the Channel Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Updating Channel Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Using the Forms Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Editing Forms in the Forms Manager Cue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Deleting Forms in the Forms Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Using HTML Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using AvantGo Client With a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Synchronizing With a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
AvantGo Client Menu Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Edit Server Profile Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Advanced Connection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Using the Mobile Link Application on Your SPT 173x Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Mobile Link Menu Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Chapter 12. Applications: Mail
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Setting Up Mail on the Desktop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Synchronizing Mail with Your E-Mail Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Opening Mail on Your SPT 1700 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Viewing Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Message Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Setting a Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Editing an Unsent Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Draft Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Filing a Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Restoring a Message From the Deleted Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Purging Deleted Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Message List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Date Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Sorting the Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HotSync Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Creating Special Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Defining Filter Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
High-Priority Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Truncating Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Mail Menu Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
Message Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29
Chapter 13. Applications: Memo Pad
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Opening the Memo Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Creating a New Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Reviewing Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Arranging Memos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Manually Arranging the Memo List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Choosing a Memo Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Marking a Private Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Deleting a Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Memo Pad Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Record Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Chapter 14. Applications: Preferences
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Buttons Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Pen Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
HotSync Buttons Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Connection Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Digitizer Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Formats Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Country Default. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Time, Date, Week Start and Numbers Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
General Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Setting the Current Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Setting the Current Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Auto-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Stay On In Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Trigger Wake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Overall, System, Alarm and Game Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Beam Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Preferences and Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop TCP/IP Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Adding Connection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Connecting to Your Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Idle Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
Creating a Login Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
Network Preferences Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
Service Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
TCP/IP Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
Creating a ShortCut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
Chapter 15. Applications: Security
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Assigning a Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Hiding Private Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Showing Private Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Masking Private Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Changing or Deleting a Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Recovering from a Lost Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Opening the To Do List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Working With To Do Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Setting Priority (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Checking Off a To Do Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
To Do Item Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Choosing a To Do Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Setting a Due Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Marking a To Do Item Private. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Deleting a To Do Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
To Do Show Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
To Do List Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Record Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
Chapter 17. Applications: Laser Scanner
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Scanning with the SPT 1700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
SScan Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
SScan Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Demo Scan Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Demo Scan Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Scanning 1-D Bar Codes Using Demo Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Barcode Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Scanning 2-Dimensional Bar Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
Scanning Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
Battery Implications While Using the Laser Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
Chapter 18. Applications: GsmDemo
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Using GsmDemo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Working with Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
GsmDemo Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Installing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Installing Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
Removing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
Removing the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
Chapter 20. Getting Help With Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Displaying Online Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
Serial Port Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
Digitizer Alignment Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
Technical Support, Service and Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-15
Chapter 21. Maintaining Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Caring for Your SPT 1700 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Resetting Your SPT 1700 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
Sample 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2
Sample 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3
Sample 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4
Sample 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5
Modifying and Creating Expense Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5
About Mapping Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5
Customizing Existing Sample Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6
Determining the Layout of the Expense Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-7
Using Your Custom Expense Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9
Programming the Mapping Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9
Using Applications Other Than Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-14
Expense File Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-14
Appendix B. Non-ASCII Characters for Login Scripts
Use of ^char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
Carriage Return and Line Feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
Literal Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
Examples: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
Index
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Introduction
The SPT 1700 product family is the next generation of pen-based, one- and two-
dimensional bar code scanning, pocket-sized terminals which also offer a new ruggedized
design, rechargeable lithium-ion battery, and optional wireless local area networking
capability. The complete line of SPT 1700 products are based on the popular Palm
ComputingTM platform architecture, offering users a fast, friendly, and flexible interface for
data acquisition and management.
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
The SPT 1700 consists of the following models.
SPT 1700
Performs 1- and 2-dimensional scanning and batch
communication. Three memory configurations are
available:
•
•
•
2MB ROM/2MB RAM
2MB ROM/8MB RAM
4MB ROM/8MB RAM.
SPT 1733
SPT 1734
Performs 1- and 2-dimensional scanning and uses the
CDPD radio to perform wide area wireless communication.
This model has the same available memory configurations
as the SPT 1700.
Performs 1- and 2-dimensional scanning and uses the
Global Systems for Mobile Communications (GSM) radio to
perform wide area wireless communication. This model has
the same available memory configurations as the SPT
1700.
SPT 1740
SPT 1742
SPT 1746
Performs 1- and 2-dimensional scanning and uses the
Symbol Spectrum24 radio to perform 1 MB and 2 MB local
area wireless communication. This model has the same
available memory configurations as the SPT 1700.
®
Performs 1- and 2-dimensional scanning and uses the
Symbol Spectrum24 radio to perform 2 MB local area
wireless communication. This model has the same
available memory configurations as the SPT 1700.
Performs 1- and 2-dimensional scanning and uses the
Symbol Spectrum24 radio to perform 11 MB local area
wireless communication. This model has the same
available memory configurations as the SPT 1700.
The SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide provides information about all the SPT
1700 Series terminals and its accessories.
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Chapter Descriptions
Topics covered in this guide are as follows:
•
controls on your SPT 1700 terminal, how to install and charge the battery, start your
SPT 1700 terminal for the first time, and set up your Symbol Palm Terminal (SPT)
Desktop software.
•
•
•
•
Chapter 2, Network Setup, explains how to set up your SPT 174x terminals for use
on Spectrum24; SPT 1733 terminals for use on CDPD; and SPT 1734 terminals for
use on GSM wireless networks, respectively.
Chapter 3, Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal, explains how to open
applications, use the on-screen keyboard, write with the stylus and use common
features on your SPT 1700 terminal.
Chapter 4, Finding Information With Your SPT 1700 Terminal, explains how to
Phone Lookup command.
Chapter 5, Applications: Address Book, explains the Address Book application,
information about your personal or business contacts.
•
•
Chapter 6, Applications: Calculator, explains the Calculator application, which
Chapter 7, Applications: Date Book, covers the Date Book application, which
associated with a time and date.
•
Chapter 8, Applications: Expense, explains the Expense application, which
enables you to keep track of your expenses and then transfer the information to a
spreadsheet on your computer.
•
•
Chapter 9, Applications: HotSync®, describes the HotSync utility, which allows you
to synchronize data between the SPT 1700 and your computer.
Chapter 10, Applications: ScoutSync Client, describes the ScoutSyncTM
application, which enables you to connect your SPT 1700 terminal to a Scout
Server and transfer data between the ScoutSync Client and your company’s back-
end applications and databases.
•
Chapter 11, Applications: AvantGo Client and Mobile Link, provides information
about using the SPT 173x terminal with the AvantGoTM and Mobile Link
applications to access the Internet.
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
•
•
Chapter 12, Applications: Mail, describes the Mail application which enables you to
manage your e-mail while away from your desk.
provides a place to take notes not associated with Date Book, Address Book or To
Do items.
•
Chapter 14, Applications: Preferences, describes the Preferences screens, which
Included in this chapter are instructions on configuring your SPT 1700 terminal for
use in the Spectrum24, CDPD, and GSM environments.
•
•
•
•
Chapter 15, Applications: Security, covers the security options available for
protecting your SPT 1700 from unauthorized users.
a convenient place to create reminders and prioritize the things that you have to do.
Chapter 17, Applications: Laser Scanner, covers laser scanner applications and
Chapter 18, Applications: GsmDemo, allows you to explore what features GSM
and the SPT 1734 terminal offer you, including sending and receiving SMS
messages.
•
•
•
•
Chapter 19, Installing and Removing Applications, explains how to install and
remove applications on your SPT 1700 terminal and how to remove the Symbol
Chapter 20, Getting Help With Your SPT 1700 Terminal, describes methods for
troubleshooting problems with the SPT 1700, and contact phone numbers for
technical support.
Chapter 21, Maintaining Your SPT 1700 Terminal, provides information to help you
also discusses how to reset your SPT 1700 terminal.
Appendix A, Using Expense Templates and Custom Expense Reports, provides
illustrations of the four expense templates that come with the Symbol Palm
Terminal (SPT) Desktop software. It also explains how to modify existing Expense
application templates, and how to create your own custom expense report
templates for use with the Expense application.
•
Appendix B, Non-ASCII Characters for Login Scripts, provides information to
enable you to create custom login scripts that require non-ASCII characters. This
information is for advanced users only.
xvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Notational Conventions
This document uses these conventions:
•
•
•
“Terminal” refers to any model of SPT 1700.
“User” refers to anyone using an application on the SPT 1700.
“You” refers to the End User, System Administrator or Technical Support person
using this manual as a reference to install, configure, operate, maintain and
troubleshoot the SPT 1700.
•
•
Italics are used to highlight specific items in the general text, and to identify
chapters and sections in this and related documents.
Bullets indicate:
•
•
lists of alternatives or action items.
lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential.
•
•
Numbered lists indicate a set of sequential steps, i.e., those that describe step-by-
step procedures.
“Tap” refers to selecting an option on the display using the stylus.
Related Documents
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPT 1700 Series Quick Reference Guide, p/n 70-37543-xx
SPT 1700/2700 Modem Module Quick Reference Guide, p/n 72-42908-xx
SPT 1700 Series Site Survey Tool User Guide, p/n 72E-39283-xx
SPT 1700 Series Site Admin Tool User Guide, p/n 72E-39284-xx
SPT 1500/1700 Scanner System Software Manual, p/n 72E-35914-xx
CRD1700-4000S Cradle Quick Reference Guide, p/n 60308-001
CRD 1700-1000S Cradle Quick Reference Guide, p/n 70-37840-xx
CRD 1700-1000M Modem Cradle Quick Reference Guide, p/n 70-40933-xx
CRD 1700-4000E Ethernet Cradle Quick Reference Guide, p/n 72-39472-xx
VCD 1700 Series Vehicle Cradle Quick Reference Guide, p/n 72-42033-xx
VCD 1700 Installation Instructions (Vehicle Cradle), p/n 72-43825-xx
MSR 3000 Magnetic Stripe Reader Quick Reference Guide, p/n 72-38392-xx
MSR 3000 Magnetic Stripe Reader System Software Manual, p/n 72-38411-xx
SPT 1733/2733 CDPD Developer’s Guide, p/n 72E-42911-xx
xvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
•
SPT 1734/PPT 2734 Developer’s Guide for GSM Wireless Wide Area Network
(WWAN), p/n 72-44271-xx
•
•
•
SPT 1740 Web Client User’s Guide, p/n 72-42792-xx
Spectrum24 Access Point AP-3020 Product Reference Guide, p/n 70-20504-xx
SPT 1740 Spectrum24 Driver Extensions Library Developer’s Guide,
p/n 70-38524-xx
Service Information
If you have a problem with the SPT 1700 equipment, contact the Symbol Support Center.
If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone, you may need to return your equipment
for servicing. If that is necessary, you will be given special directions.
Note:Symbol Technologies is not responsible for any damages incurred
during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used.
Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty. If the
original shipping container has not been kept, contact Symbol to
have another sent to you.
xviii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Symbol Support Centers
For service information, warranty information or technical assistance contact or call the
Symbol Support Center in:
United States
Symbol Technologies, Inc.
Canada
Symbol Technologies Canada, Inc.
2540 Matheson Boulevard East
Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L4W 4Z2
905-629-7226
One Symbol Plaza
Holtsville, New York 11742-1300
1-800-659-2240
United Kingdom
Symbol Technologies
Asia/Pacific
Symbol Technologies Asia, Inc.
230 Victoria Street #04-05
Bugis Junction Office Tower
Singapore 188024
Symbol Place
Winnersh Triangle, Berkshire RG41 5TP
United Kingdom
0800 328 2424 (Inside UK)
+44 208 945 7529 (Outside UK)
337-6588 (Inside Singapore)
+65-337-6588 (Outside Singapore)
Australia
Symbol Technologies Pty. Ltd.
432 St. Kilda Road
Austria
Symbol Technologies Austria GmbH
Prinz-Eugen Strasse 70
Suite 3
Melbourne, Victoria 3004
1-800-672-906 (Inside Australia)
+61-3-9866-6044 (Outside Australia)
2.Haus, 5.Stock
1040 Vienna, Austria
1-505-5794 (Inside Austria)
+43-1-505-5794 (Outside Austria)
Denmark
Symbol Technologies AS
Gydevang 2,
Europe/Mid-East Distributor Operations
Contact your local distributor or call
+44 208 945 7360
DK-3450 Allerod, Denmark
7020-1718 (Inside Denmark)
+45-7020-1718 (Outside Denmark)
xix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Finland
France
Oy Symbol Technologies
Kaupintie 8 A 6
Symbol Technologies France
Centre d'Affaire d'Antony
FIN-00440 Helsinki, Finland
9 5407 580 (Inside Finland)
+358 9 5407 580 (Outside Finland)
3 Rue de la Renaissance
92184 Antony Cedex, France
01-40-96-52-21 (Inside France)
+33-1-40-96-52-50 (Outside France)
Germany
Symbol Technologies GmbH
Waldstrasse 68
Italy
Symbol Technologies Italia S.R.L.
Via Cristoforo Columbo, 49
20090 Trezzano S/N Navigilo
Milano, Italy
D-63128 Dietzenbach, Germany
6074-49020 (Inside Germany)
+49-6074-49020 (Outside Germany)
2-484441 (Inside Italy)
+39-02-484441 (Outside Italy)
Latin America Sales Support
7900 Glades Road
Mexico
Symbol Technologies Mexico Ltd.
Torre Picasso
Suite 340
Boca Raton, Florida 33434 USA
1-800-347-0178 (Inside United States)
+1-561-483-1275 (Outside United States)
Boulevard Manuel Avila Camacho No 88
Lomas de Chapultepec CP 11000
Mexico City, DF, Mexico
5-520-1835 (Inside Mexico)
+52-5-520-1835 (Outside Mexico)
Netherlands
Symbol Technologies
Norway
Symbol Technologies
Trollasveien 36
Kerkplein 2, 7051 CX
Postbus 24 7050 AA
Postboks 72
Varsseveld, Netherlands
1414 Trollasen, Norway
66810600 (Inside Norway)
+47-66810600 (Outside Norway)
315-271700 (Inside Netherlands)
+31-315-271700 (Outside Netherlands)
xx
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
South Africa
Symbol Technologies Africa Inc.
Block B2
Spain
Symbol Technologies S.A.
Edificioi la Piovera Azul
Rutherford Estate
C. Peonias, No. 2 - Sexta Planta
28042 Madrid, Spain
1 Scott Street
Waverly 2090 Johannesburg
Republic of South Africa
11-4405668 (Inside South Africa)
+27-11-4405668 (Outside South Africa)
9-1-320-39-09 (Inside Spain)
+34-9-1-320-39-09 (Outside Spain)
Sweden
Symbol Technologies AB
Albygatan 109D
Solna
Sweden
84452900 (Inside Sweden)
+46 84452900 (Outside Sweden)
If you purchased your Symbol product from a Symbol Business Partner, contact that
Business Partner for service.
Warranty
Symbol Technologies, Inc. (“Symbol”) manufactures its hardware products in accordance with
industry-standard practices. Symbol warrants that for a period of twelve (12) months from date of
shipment, products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship.
This warranty is provided to the original owner only and is not transferable to any third party. It shall
not apply to any product (i) which has been repaired or altered unless done or approved by Symbol,
(ii) which has not been maintained in accordance with any operating or handling instructions supplied
by Symbol, (iii) which has been subjected to unusual physical or electrical stress, misuse, abuse,
power shortage, negligence or accident or (iv) which has been used other than in accordance with
the product operating and handling instructions. Preventive maintenance is the responsibility of
customer and is not covered under this warranty.
Wear items and accessories having a Symbol serial number, will carry a 90-day limited warranty. Non-
serialized items will carry a 30-day limited warranty.
xxi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Warranty Coverage and Procedure
During the warranty period, Symbol will repair or replace defective products returned to Symbol’s
manufacturing plant in the US. For warranty service in North America, call the Symbol Support Center
at 1-800-659-2240. International customers should contact the local Symbol office or support center.
If warranty service is required, Symbol will issue a Return Material Authorization Number. Products
must be shipped in the original or comparable packaging, shipping and insurance charges prepaid.
Symbol will ship the repaired or replacement product freight and insurance prepaid in North America.
Shipments from the US or other locations will be made F.O.B. Symbol’s manufacturing plant.
Symbol will use new or refurbished parts at its discretion and will own all parts removed from repaired
products. Customer will pay for the replacement product in case it does not return the replaced
product to Symbol within 3 days of receipt of the replacement product. The process for return and
customer’s charges will be in accordance with Symbol’s Exchange Policy in effect at the time of the
exchange.
Customer accepts full responsibility for its software and data including the appropriate backup
thereof.
Repair or replacement of a product during warranty will not extend the original warranty term.
Symbol’s Customer Service organization offers an array of service plans, such as on-site, depot, or
phone support, that can be implemented to meet customer’s special operational requirements and
are available at a substantial discount during warranty period.
General
Except for the warranties stated above, Symbol disclaims all warranties, express or implied, on
products furnished hereunder, including without limitation implied warranties of merchantability and
fitness for a particular purpose. The stated express warranties are in lieu of all obligations or liabilities
on part of Symbol for damages, including without limitation, special, indirect, or consequential
damages arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of the product.
Seller’s liability for damages to buyer or others resulting from the use of any product, shall in no way
exceed the purchase price of said product, except in instances of injury to persons or property.
Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the proceeding exclusion or limitation may not apply to you.
xxii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Unpacking the Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Parts of the SPT 1700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Getting Started with the SPT 1700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Setting Up the Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Installing the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Charging the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Attaching the Handstrap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Starting the SPT 1700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Configuring the Spectrum24 Network (SPT 174x only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Configuring the Wide Area Network (SPT 173x only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Using the SPT 1700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Using the Power Button/Backlight Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Using the Contrast Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Writing with the Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Using the Onscreen Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Icon Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started with the SPT 1700
Introduction
This chapter explains the physical buttons and controls on your SPT 1700 terminal, how to
install and charge the battery, start your SPT 1700 Series terminal for the first time, set up
your cradle and install your Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software.
Unpacking the Terminal
Carefully remove all protective material from around the terminal and save the shipping
container for later storage and shipping.
Verify that you received all equipment listed on the packing slip and inspect the equipment
for damage. If any equipment is missing or damaged, contact the Symbol Technologies
Support Center immediately. Refer to page xviii for contact information.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Parts of the SPT 1700
Front View
Laser Decode LED
Center Scan Button
WAN Antenna
(SPT 1733/34 only)
Scroll Button
(Up and Down)
Scroll Button
(Up and Down)
Right Scan Trigger
LCD (Screen)
Graffiti Input Area
Applications Icon
Calculator Icon
Find Icon
Menu Icon
Power Button
Contrast Button
Application Buttons
Left View
Left Scan
Trigger
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started with the SPT 1700
Back View
Stylus
Infrared Port
Handstrap Connector
Speaker
Stylus Silo
Reset Button
Battery
Compartment
Lithium-Ion Battery
Battery Latch
Battery Latch
Battery Cover
Handstrap Connector
Bottom View
Top View
Scanner Exit Window
Serial Port
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Getting Started with the SPT 1700
Before you can use your SPT 1700, perform the basic set up procedures covered on the
following pages. Specifically:
•
•
•
•
Set up the cradle (optional)
Install and charge the battery
Start the SPT 1700
Initiate a Spectrum24 network (SPT 174x only) or wide area network (WAN)
connection (SPT 173X only).
Setting Up the Cradle
There are optional cable and cradle solutions that enable you to charge the terminal’s
battery and synchronize information on your SPT 1700 terminal with host system
applications.
There are several cable and cradle options available for the SPT 1700:
•
•
•
•
•
Synchronization/Charging Cable
CRD1700-1000S Single-slot Serial Cradle
CRD1700-4000S Four-slot Serial Cradle
CRD1700-1000M Single-slot Modem Cradle
CRD1700-4000E Four-slot Ethernet Cradle.
This section describes the procedures for connecting each of these cradles to the host PC.
Using the Synchronization/Charging Cable
To charge the terminal’s battery using the Synchronization/Charging Cable:
1. Make sure the battery is installed in the terminal. Refer to Installing the Battery on
page 1-13 for instructions.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started with the SPT 1700
2. Insert the cable into the bottom of the terminal, as shown.
Synchronization/
Charging Cable
3. Plug the power cable into a wall outlet and plug the other end into the battery
charging receptacle on the side of the Synchronization/Charging Cable.
Battery Charging
Receptacle
Power Supply
Serial Cable
The battery is fully charged after approximately two hours.
To perform serial host communication using the cable, plug the other end of the cable into
an available communication port on the back of the host computer.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
CRD1700-1000S Single-slot Serial Cradle
To connect the cradle:
1. Turn off your computer.
2. Plug one end of the serial cable into the host connector on the back of the cradle.
3. Plug the other end of the serial cable into the serial communication port on your
computer.
Note:You may require a 9-pin to 25-pin adapter, p/n 160-0072 to connect
the cable to the serial port on the back of your computer.
Note:Your SPT 1700 terminal requires a dedicated port. It cannot share a
port with an internal modem or other device. If you are unsure about
the location of the serial port on your computer, refer to the user’s
manual supplied with the computer.
4. Connect the power jack to the power receptacle on the back of the cradle.
5. Plug the power cable into the wall.
CRD1700-4000S Four-slot Serial Cradle
To connect the cradle:
1. Turn off your computer.
2. Plug one end of the serial cable into the host connector on the back of the cradle.
3. Plug the other end of the serial cable into the serial communication port on your
computer.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started with the SPT 1700
Note:You may require a 9-pin to 25-pin adapter, p/n 160-0072 to connect
the cable to the serial port on the back of your computer.
Note:Your SPT 1700 terminal requires a dedicated port. It cannot share a
port with an internal modem or other device. If you are unsure about
the location of the serial port on your computer, refer to the user’s
manual supplied with the computer.
4. Connect the power jack into the power receptacle on the back of the cradle.
5. Plug the power cable into the wall.
CRD1700-1000M Modem Cradle
To connect the cradle:
1. Turn off your computer.
2. Plug the RJ-41 connector of the communication cable into the Line Out port on the
back of the cradle.
3. Plug the other end of the cable into the serial port on the back of your computer.
4. Plug one end of the phone cord into the Line In port on the cradle, and the other
end into a wall phone jack.
5. Connect one end of the power cable into the power port on the back of the cradle,
and plug the other end into a wall outlet.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Note:Your SPT 1700 terminal requires a dedicated port. It cannot share a
port with an internal modem or other device. If you are unsure about
the location of the serial port on your computer, refer to the user’s
manual supplied with the computer.
terminal for modem synchronization.
CRD1700-4000E Ethernet Cradle
Before setting up the cradle, make sure that Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop Software (p/n
SW-35138-xx) is installed and running on the host computer, as well as properly configured
Network HotSync software on the SPT 1700 terminal. Refer to the section Symbol Palm
Terminal Desktop Software on page 1-23 for instructions on installing this software. Specific
software setup necessary to use the CRD1700-4000E is discussed in Chapter 9,
Applications: HotSync®.
A DHCP server must be configured and operational on the subnet to which the cradle will
be attached.
To connect the cradle:
1. Connect the power supply cable round plug to the power connector on the back of
the cradle.
2. Connect the power supply AC plug to a standard electrical outlet.
Note:International customers must use a separate AC power cable
appropriate for their respective country.
DC Power
Connector
The cradle’s LEDs blink, then remain off until a terminal is inserted into one or more of the
slots.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started with the SPT 1700
To set up for network communications:
1. Ensure there is a DHCP server accessible to the CRD1700-4000E on the subnet
to which it will be attached.
2. Connect one end of a standard 10 Base-T network cable to the middle connector
on the back of the CRD1700-4000E. Connect the other end of the cable to a hub
which is connected to your subnet.
3. Power-up the unit; the CRD1700-4000E performs its power-up sequence, then
attempts to collect all network parameters from the local DHCP server.
If configuration of the unit from the local DHCP server fails, all LEDs flash red. The unit
becomes unresponsive until power is removed, the unit is connected to a network with a
DHCP server, and power is restored.
Note:Before communication between the SPT 1700 terminal and the host
computer can take place, the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop
Software must be installed and running on the host computer.
VCD 1700 Series Vehicle Cradle
The SPT 1700 provides a serial port at the bottom of the terminal. When you insert a
terminal into a VCD 1700 cradle, it connects to the cradle’s serial port. The terminal can
then use the cradle’s serial port to communicate with an external device.
To connect the cradle:
1. Plug a 9-pin serial cable into the serial port located next to the power port at the
bottom of the cradle. Note that some devices may require the serial cable to be a
null modem cable.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Power Input Cable
Serial Cable
To Ve h i c l e
Power Source
To External Device
Note:The external device must use an RS-232 serial connection limited to
TXD, RXD, RTS and CTS data lines. It must also have its own power
supply, as the cradle’s serial port does not provide power.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the serial port of the external device (e.g., a
host computer, printer, or modem).
To begin communication:
1. Insert the terminal into the cradle.
2. Connect the Power Input cable to your vehicle power source. Then plug the cable
into the Power Port on the terminal.
3. To initiate communication, make appropriate selections on the terminal, as
determined by the application you are using.
Note:Removing a terminal during data communication will disrupt
communication between the terminal and the attached device.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started with the SPT 1700
Installing the Battery
To install the battery in your SPT 1700:
1. Open the latches on the battery cover and lift it away from the SPT 1700.
Latch
Latch
2. Insert the lithium-ion battery in the battery compartment, making sure it snaps into
place.
3. Replace the battery cover and re-secure the latches.
Note:Be careful to position the battery latches completely open while
securing the battery cover on the terminal.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Charging the Battery
Before using your SPT 1700 for the first time, charge the lithium-ion battery. The terminal’s
battery can be charged using the Cradle, the Synchronization/Charging Cable, or the
Universal Battery Charger (UBC). For instructions on using the UBC to charge your
same procedures to recharge the battery when the terminal’s battery level is low.
Using the Cradle to Charge the Battery
To charge the terminal’s battery using the CRD 1700 cradle:
1. Make sure the battery is installed in the terminal. Refer to Installing the Battery on
page 1-13 for instructions.
2. Make sure the cradle is plugged into a wall outlet.
3. Insert the SPT 1700 terminal in the cradle as shown:
Battery
Charging
LED
On the CRD1700-1000S, the battery charging LED turns red to indicate that the battery is
charging, then turns green after approximately two hours to indicate that the terminal’s
battery is fully charged.
Spare Battery Charging
The CRD1700-1000S single-slot cradle has a spare battery charging slot which charges
the terminal’s spare battery. Insert the battery in the spare battery charging slot in the back
of the cradle. The spare battery charging LED turns red to indicate the spare battery is
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started with the SPT 1700
charging, then turns green after approximately two hours to indicate the battery is fully
charged.
Spare Battery
Charging LED
Attaching the Handstrap
The SPT 1700 has an optional handstrap which increases comfort when holding the
terminal for extended periods of time. To attach the handstrap to the back of the terminal:
1. Thread the metal piece through the metal handstrap connection on the back of the
terminal.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
2. Slide the flat metal piece into the handstrap connection on the bottom of the
terminal.
Thread metal piece
through this connector
Slide flat metal piece
up and into this
connector
3. Adjust the velcro® strap to fit your hand.
Starting the SPT 1700
After charging and installing the battery, start the terminal by pressing the red power button
on the front of the unit. If the terminal does not power on, perform a hard reset.
Note:When starting the terminal for the first time, or whenever the battery
is completely drained, a hard reset is required.
To hard-reset the terminal:
1. Remove the battery cover from the back of the terminal.
2. Hold down the power button on the front of the SPT 1700 terminal.
3. While holding down the power button, use the tip of the stylus to gently press the
reset button on the back of the terminal.
4. Release the reset button.
5. Release the power button.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started with the SPT 1700
6. When a message displays on the screen warning that you are about to erase all
the data stored on your SPT 1700 terminal, do one of the following:
a. Press the upper half of either of the scroll buttons on the front panel of the SPT
1700 terminal to complete the hard reset and display the Digitizer screen.
b. Press any other button to perform a soft reset.
Note:With a hard reset, the current date and time are retained. Formats
Preferences and other settings are restored to their factory default
settings.
After initial start up, always start the terminal by pressing the red power button.
Calibrating the Screen
The first time you start your SPT 1700 (or after a hard reset), the calibration screen
displays. Follow the steps in this section to align the internal circuitry of your SPT 1700 with
its touch-sensitive screen.
Note:If your SPT 1700 unit came pre-loaded with a custom software
application, you may not need to calibrate your screen, in which
case you will not see the calibration screen.
To calibrate your SPT 1700 for first time use:
1. Press the power button on the front panel of your SPT 1700 to display the
calibration screen. (This screen also displays following a hard reset).
Power
Button
2. Remove the stylus from its storage silo on the back of the SPT 1700.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
3. Tap the exact center of each target that displays on the screen with the tip of the
stylus.
If you need to recalibrate the screen at any time, open the Prefs application, tap on the pull-
down menu at the top right corner of the screen, and select the digitizer option.
Setting the Time
The General Preferences screen is the first screen to display after you align the digitizer on
your SPT 1700 terminal.
Note:If the General Preferences screen is not on your SPT 1700 terminal
screen, you may have pressed one of the application buttons on the
front panel. Refer to General Preferences on page 14-10 for
information on displaying the General Preferences screen.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started with the SPT 1700
To set the current time:
1. Tap the Set Time box in the General Preferences screen to open the Set Time
screen.
Tap here
2. Tap the up or down arrows to change the hour.
3. Tap the minutes box, and then tap the arrows to adjust the settings for the current
time.
4. Tap the AM or PM box to select the time of day.
Note:Your SPT 1700 terminal can also display time based on a 24-hour
clock. Refer to Formats Preferences on page 14-9.
5. Tap the OK button to close the Set Time screen and return to the General
Preferences screen.
Setting the Current Date
The Set Date box in the General Preferences screen is used to set the current date for your
SPT 1700 terminal.
To set the current date:
1. Tap the Set Date box to open the Set Date screen.
2. Tap the arrows at the top to select the current year.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Tap arrows to select year
Tap to select month
Tap to select date
3. Tap a month box to select the current month.
4. Tap the current date to close the Set Date screen and return to the General
Preferences screen.
Note:You do not need to adjust the other General Preference settings at
information about the remaining options.
Configuring the Spectrum24 Network (SPT 174x only)
set up with the equipment required to run the wireless LAN and your terminal must be
properly configured. Refer to Chapter 2, Network Setup for instructions on configuring your
terminal for use with Spectrum24.
Configuring the Wide Area Network (SPT 173x only)
Before the SPT 173X can be used on a WAN (CDPD or GSM), your terminal must be
properly configured. Refer to Chapter 2, Network Setup for instructions on configuring your
terminal for use with a WAN.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started with the SPT 1700
Using the SPT 1700
This section describes the procedures for the basic use of the SPT 1700 series terminal.
Topics covered include powering on the terminal, using the backlight, adjusting the screen
contrast, writing with the stylus, and using the onscreen keyboard.
Using the Power Button/Backlight Control
The power button turns the SPT 1700 on and off. This button also serves as your backlight
control for low-light conditions. With the unit on, press and hold the power button for
approximately 2 seconds to turn the backlight on and off.
Note:When the backlight is on, the screen text displays in reverse video.
Using the Contrast Control
The contrast control button is located on the lower right-hand side of the terminal.
Contrast
Control
To adjust the contrast:
1. Press the contrast control button, which displays the contrast adjusting bar on the
terminal’s screen.
2. Using your stylus, adjust the contrast by scrolling the contrast bar until the contrast
is set to the desired level, or use either of the scroll buttons on the top of the
terminal to adjust the contrast level.
3. Press the contrast control button or tap Done on the terminal screen to turn off the
contrast control.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Writing with the Stylus
Your SPT 1700 includes Graffiti® handwriting software as the primary system for entering
text and numbers. Graffiti is a system where simple strokes you write with the stylus are
instantly recognized as letters or numbers. Refer to Writing Graffiti with the Stylus on page
3-6 for more information.
Using the Onscreen Keyboard
You can activate the on-screen keyboard any time you need to enter text or numbers on
your SPT 1700. Note that you cannot enter Graffiti characters while using the on-screen
keyboard.
To use the on-screen keyboard:
1. Open any SPT 1700 application.
2. Tap any record name, or tap the New button with the tip of the stylus.
3. Tap the left target to open the Alpha keyboard, or tap the right target to open the
Numeric keyboard.
Tap here for numbers
Tap here for letters
keyboard
keyboard
Refer to Using the On-Screen Keyboard on page 3-17 for additional information.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started with the SPT 1700
Icon Descriptions
Applications Icon
Tap to exit the current application and to display a list of available
applications for selection.
Calculator Icon
Menu Icon
Tap to display the calculator application.
Tap from within an application to display the menu of options for the
selected application.
Find Icon
Tap from within an application to enter search criteria to find an entry.
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop Software
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software extends many of the functions of your SPT 1700
Series terminal to your computer. Although using Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software
is optional, when you use it with your SPT 1700 Series terminal and the built-in HotSync
technology, you can fully synchronize the information on your SPT 1700 Series terminal
with the information on your computer. Changes you make on your SPT 1700 Series
terminal or Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop display in both places after you synchronize.
With Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software you can:
•
Palm Terminal Desktop software duplicates the Date Book, Address Book, To Do
List and Memo Pad applications on your SPT 1700 terminal, so you can view, enter
and modify any data stored on your SPT 1700 terminal.
•
Back up the data stored on your SPT 1700 terminal with HotSync technology and
synchronize the data with the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software.
Synchronization is a one-step procedure that ensures your data is always safe and
up-to-date. Refer to Chapter 9, Applications: HotSync® for information about using
this feature.
•
•
Import and export data, so you can easily transfer data from other Windows
applications into Address Book or Memo Pad.
Print your Date Book, Address Book, To Do List and Memo Pad information on any
Windows-compatible printer.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
System Requirements
To install and operate the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software, your computer system
must meet the following requirements:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0
IBM-compatible 486 computer or higher
8 MB RAM (memory) minimum, 16 MB recommended
12 MB available hard disk space
VGA monitor or better
CD-ROM drive
Mouse
One available serial port.
Optional Equipment
•
•
Modem
Windows-compatible printer.
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop Software Installation
The following instructions guide you through installing the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop
software. After you install the software, refer to the Help menu for complete information
about how to use the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software.
To ensure a safe and uninterrupted installation of the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop
software, do the following before installing:
•
•
Connect the cradle to your computer.
If you have placed your SPT 1700 terminal in the cradle, remove it during software
installation.
•
•
Exit all programs, including those that run automatically at startup, such as fax
software, virus protection software, screen-saver software, and application
toolbars such as Microsoft® Office.
Do not simply copy the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop files to your hard drive. You
must use the installer to place the files in their proper locations and then
decompress them.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started with the SPT 1700
To install the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software:
1. Insert the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop Software CD into the CD-ROM drive on
the PC.
2. If your CD-ROM supports the auto-run feature, an installation menu automatically
displays on your desktop. If not, navigate to your CD-ROM drive and double-click
on setup.exe. The Welcome Screen displays.
3. Follow the directions as the installation program guides you through the install
process.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Configuring a Spectrum24 Connection (SPT 174x Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Configuring a CDPD WAN Connection (SPT 1733 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Maintenance Screens and Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Merlin Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Merlin Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Configuring a GSM WAN Connection (SPT 1734 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Setup
Introduction
Wireless networks allow SPT 1700 series terminals to communicate wirelessly, and to send
captured data “real time” to a host device. Terminals and their supported network types are:
Terminal
SPT 174x
SPT 1733
Network Technology
Spectrum24 (LAN)
CDPD (WAN)
Before a terminal can be used on a Spectrum24 LAN, your facility must be set up with the
equipment required to run the network and the terminal must be properly configured. Before
a terminal can be used on a CDPD/GSM WAN, you must activiate your device on the
network. Refer to the following sections for specific configuration information for each
terminal type: Configuring a Spectrum24 Connection (SPT 174x Only), Configuring a
CDPD WAN Connection (SPT 1733 Only), and Configuring a GSM WAN Connection (SPT
1734 Only).
Configuring a Spectrum24 Connection
(SPT 174x Only)
To configure your SPT 174x terminal for use on a Spectrum24 network:
1. On the Main Application screen, tap the
icon.
2. Tap the preference options pick list and select Network. The Network Preference
screen displays:
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Note:Refer to Network Preferences Menu Commands on page 14-27 for
details about using the Network Preferences menu options.
3. Tap the Service pick list and select Spectrum24, then tap Details. The Spectrum24
Preferences screen displays:
Enter the following information:
4. Extended Service Set ID (ESS ID).
The ESS ID identifies the radio network and differentiates between different radio
networks. All terminals on the same network, as well as the access points in your
facility, must have the same ESS ID. Ask your System Administrator for the correct
ESS ID number of your network.
5. Internet Protocol address (IP).
Each SPT 174x terminal requires a unique internet address (IP address). This
address can be administered and entered manually through the terminal, or
administered and allocated by a server on the network, using DHCP.
Note:The default value for this field is Use DHCP. Use this option if you
want the IP address to be dynamically selected by the DHCP server.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Setup
a. To manually enter the IP address information for this terminal, deselect Use
DHCP and tap Settings. The IP Settings screen displays:
b. Enter the IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway address for this terminal.
Tap each field to display a keypad for selection of the address information. Each
part of the four-part address must be in the range of 0-255; numbers are the only
allowable characters in these fields. Ask your Internet Service Provider or your
System Administrator for the correct IP, Subnet and Gateway information.
c. Tap Done to exit the Keypad.
d. Tap OK to save the information and return to the Spectrum24 Preferences
screen.
6. To enable DNS, tap the Enable DNS box. A Details button is added to the screen.
Note:Many systems do not require a DNS. If you are not sure, leave the
DNS fields blank.
a. Tap Details to display the Details screen.
Enter the Host and Domain Names. If you need more space to enter name
information, tap the arrow to the right of these fields to display a blank screen.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Tap the Primary and Secondary DNS fields to display a keypad to enter the
address information for these fields. Each part of the four-part address must be in
the range of 0-255; numbers are the only allowable characters in these fields. Ask
your Internet Service Provider or System Administrator for the correct Primary or
Secondary DNS numbers.
b. Tap OK to save the information and return to the Spectrum24 Preferences
Screen, or Cancel to return to this screen without saving the DNS information.
7. Tap the Radio Config button to set the radio configuration parameters.
Note:This button is available for the SPT 1746 only.
a. The following parameters display:
PwrMode
The power-saving level of the terminal.
“5” uses the least power and is the
recommended configuration.
Diversity
Determines whether the radio firmware
attempts to use one or two antenna
ports for communications. It is
important to match this setting with the
actual number of antennas in use.
If set to “Both”, the radio firmware
attempts to use both antenna ports for
communications.
Both is the default and provides the
best chance of a clear signal.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Setup
Channel
The specific Direct-Sequence Channel
used for communications between the
AP (Access Point) and the MU (Mobile
Unit). Channels are unique per country.
Preamble
Approximately 8 bytes of the packet
header generated by the AP and is
attached to the packet prior to
transmission. Preamble length is
transmission data rate dependent. The
short preamble is 50% shorter than
long preamble.
Both the MU and AP need to be set to
the same preamble to associate.
Encryption
Tap to enable encryption, an efficient
method of preventing data theft and
improving data security.
Key Index
The specific algorithm used for each
encryption key.
Encrypt Len
Encryption length.
Choose either 40 bit or 128 bit.
40-bit encryption: Requires a 10 Hex
digit Encryption key.
128-bit encryption: Requires an access
code. Contact the Symbol
Technologies Support Center
(1-800-653-5350) for details.
Keys 1 - 4
Specific key codes required for
encryption.
Note:Symbol Technologies recommends using the default settings, as
they have been set to maximize the performance of the SPT 1746.
8. Tap Done when configuration is complete, then tap OK to return to the Spectrum24
Preferences screen.
9. Tap Connect to connect to the network.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Configuring a CDPD WAN Connection (SPT 1733
Only)
Before the SPT 1733 terminal can be used, you need to be activated on a CDPD network.
All CDPD identification and address information is entered through the Preferences
application on the SPT 1733 terminal.
To configure your SPT 1733 terminal for use on a CDPD network, tap the
Applications Launcher. The main Merlin screen displays:
icon from the
Setup Wizard
The first time that the MerlinTM Modem Manager software is started the Setup Wizard will
display and prompt you through the steps to configure and set up the terminal for operation.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Setup
Note:If this is not the first time you are accessing the Merlin Modem
Manager, Tap the
menu.
icon and select Setup Wizard from the Merlin
At any time, you can choose to cancel the Setup Wizard and exit back to the Application
Launcher by tapping the Cancel button. If you do choose to cancel, the Setup Wizard will
be displayed the next time that the Modem Manager is selected. It is recommended that
once you begin the setup process you continue through to its completion.
1. To begin configuration, tap Next. The Network Provider screen displays:
2. Select a Wireless Provider from the pick list:
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
3. Tap Other if you need to enter a Service Provider Interface number representing a
different carrier. The following screen displays:
4. Enter the SPI number and tap Done.
5. The Network Provider screen reappears. Tap Next to continue.
Note:The Setup Wizard will not proceed until a CDPD carrier selection
has been made.
6. The Configure Palm Device screen displays:
7. Tap the Configure Preferences button to configure the terminal with the network
library settings that Symbol recommends. A “Palm Configuration Complete”
message will display below the Configure Preferences button when the process is
finished.
Note:If you are confident that the Network Preferences are correct, you
may bypass this step. However, it strongly suggested that you verify
preference configuration.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Setup
8. Tap Next to continue. The Contact A Provider screen displays:
You are informed that you will need an IP address and two DNS addresses from
your Network Provider before continuing. Tap Next to continue.
9. The Settings screen displays:
10. Enter the required information and tap Next to continue. You are prompted to
confirm the settings. Verify the information you entered is accurate and tap Next.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
11. Once the modem has been configured, the Auto Config screen displays:
i
Tap to attempt
connection with the
network now
Tap if you are going to
wait for your account
to be registered
Tapping either button displays the Check Network screen as the modem attempts
to register.
12. When the modem connects successfully and the following screen displays:
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Setup
Maintenance Screens and Menus
The SPT 1733 terminal includes menu commands to make it fast and easy to configure and
check the status of your modem. This section explains the menu commands specific to the
Merlin Modem Manager.
Quick Status Screen
The initial Merlin Modem Manager screen displays numerous modem parameters. These
include the detection of a CDPD channel and whether the modem has successfully
registered. The modem's status is updated every 3 seconds.
Setting
Description
Cellular Signal
Present
When checked, it indicates that the modem has identified a
cellular signal.
CDPD Service
Detected
When checked, it indicates that the modem has identified and
is synchronized to a CDPD signal in the area.
Modem Ready
Registered
When checked, it indicates that the modem has successfully
registered with a CDPD service provider in the coverage area.
When the indicator is lit a working data connection exists and
can be used by other applications to transmit and receive
data. Until this checkbox is selected, the modem can neither
transmit nor receive data.
RSSI
Measures Received Signal Strength from the wireless base
station. These values range from one to ten bars. The greater
the number of bars, the better the performance of the modem.
Error Detect
When checked, it indicates that a large number of errors have
been detected by the modem. Under these circumstances the
modem may continue to operate but with a severely reduced
performance, caused by the increased likelihood of
connection retries and data errors when communicating with
the wireless base station.
System Busy
When checked, it indicates that the currently detected CDPD
system is busy. The modem may continue to operate but at a
decreased level of performance.
Wireless Provider
Displays the CDPD channel’s System Provider’s Identifier.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Setting
RF Channel
Description
Shows the CDPD channel that is currently active. If the unit is
not registered or is searching for a channel, the value
displayed will be either "Searching A" or "Searching B”,
depending on the state of the modem. Once a channel has
been detected, a numeric value for the channel is displayed.
Registration Error
Shutdown
This shows either "None" or a numeric value between 1 and
7. If "None" is displayed there was a successful registration
without any errors. If a numeric error code is displayed then an
error has occurred. Tap to display details about the error.
Turns the modem off.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Setup
Merlin Menu Options
Tapping the Menu key provides a series of menus. Merlin Modem Manager software
supports shortcuts to access any of the menus. The following are the available menu
options.
Merlin Menu
Disconnect Terminates the active Network session with the modem. If
disconnected, the Merlin Modem Manager can no longer perform
3-second updates.
Shutdown Performs the same function as Disconnect.
Terminates the active Network session with the modem and forces
the modem to power off. If the modem is shutdown, the Merlin
Modem Manager can no longer perform 3-second updates.
Reconnect Reconnects a network session that has previously been
disconnected. When Reconnect is selected, the 3-second
updates of the software begin again.
Network
Prefs
Brings the user directly to the Network Preferences screen. Refer
to Chapter 14, Applications: Preferences for details.
Setup
Launches the Setup Wizard to configure your modem.
Wizard
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Advanced Menu
Config (Configuration)
Status
Displays the network connection configuration screen,
allowing you to make the desired changes or refinements
Displays the Detailed Status screen, which shows
various details about how your modem is connecting to a
purposes and for assisting customer service in
diagnosing any problems you may encounter with
Network connections. Refer to Status Screen on page 2-
20 for detailed information.
Terminal
Ping
Displays the terminal emulator, allowing you to connect to
and send AT commands to the modem. Refer to Terminal
Screen on page 2-22 for detailed information.
Displays the Ping screen, allowing to send a packet to a
particular IP address to determine if it is online. Refer to
Ping Screen on page 2-23 for detailed information.
Configuration Screen
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Setup
You can select any of the buttons, or triggers, and modify their settings. Note that none of
your changes will become active until you tap the Save button. When Save is selected, you
are provided with the Disconnecting and Reconnecting screens, indicating that the settings
are being saved and the modem is being reset with the new settings. The Save button also
returns you to the Quick Status screen.
IP Address
This is the current IP address of the modem. Tap to enter
a new IP address.
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Sleep Mode
This is the current Primary DNS address of the modem.
Tap to enter a new DNS address.
This is the current Secondary DNS address of the modem.
Tap to enter a new DNS address.
Allows or disallows the modem to enter the low-power
used on Wireless IP networks that support it.
Network Provider
Configure the side preferences for the modem. All CDPD
systems are categorized into "A" systems or "B" systems.
This setting determines which system category
(categories) how the modem will search for a CDPD
system among the two system category choices. Refer to
Network Provider pick list on page 2-18 for detailed
information.
SPI, SPNI, WASI
Service ID Pref
Configures all identification values for a particular system
or Wireless IP network. Also called Service ID parameters.
Configures the preferences for the service ID parameters.
Refer to Network Provider pick list on page 2-18 for
detailed information.
Channel Hot List
Hot List Operation
Configures a list of channels upon which the modem will
attempt to find service. This user-configurable list can
contain up to 32 channels, listed in the particular order that
you want the modem to use.
Configures how the Channel Hot List entered is used.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Sleep Mode pick list
Enabled
The modem will attempt to enter a low-power mode if it is not required to
carry out any communications with a Network. The modem may respond
sluggishly to the first communication request when it is required again.
Disabled The modem is not allowed to enter sleep mode.
Network Provider pick list
A only
The modem will search for a CDPD system on the "A" side only. For users
who do not roam, this selection can sometimes speed the registration
process, as the modem does not have to look on the "B" side as well
before it can register.
B only
Same as "A only" except on the "B" side.
Prefer A
The modem will search for a CDPD system on the "A" side first and
attempt registration on any system it finds. However, if the modem cannot
register on the "A" side, it will then attempt to find service on the "B" side.
For users who roam, this setting would be appropriate if the home system
was on the "A" side.
Prefer B
The modem will search for a CDPD system on the "B" side first and
attempt registration on any system it finds. However, if the modem cannot
register on the "B" side, it will then attempt to find service on the "A" side.
For users who roam, this setting would be appropriate if the home system
was on the "B" side.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Setup
Service ID Pref pick list
Only SvcID The modem will attempt to detect only the system in the Service
ID parameters for registration. This is useful in cases where the
user wishes to prevent roaming to any other system but his home
one.
PreferSvcId The modem will first attempt to register on the system described
by the SPI/WASI/SPNI entries. If no system is found, the modem
will attempt to register on the remaining available systems in the
area. This is useful in situations where the user spends most of his
time in one area and occasionally roams. In this case, the user
would enter the Network ID parameters that reflect the system he
most often will register on. Another situation where this may be
useful is in cases where the user has two systems in his area but
prefers service on one due to rate advantages, etc.
IgnoreSvcID The modem will attempt to register on any system but that
reflected in the Network ID entries. This is useful in situations
where the user wishes to block registration on systems in his area
that he does not have an agreement with. This may speed up the
registration process in some areas.
Any SvcID
The SPI/WASI/SPNI entries are ignored. This is the default
configuration and ensures that the modem will attempt to register
on any valid system that it can find.
Hot List Operation pick list
Scan All
Use List
Ignores the list of channels and search all of them.
Attempts to search for system on the channels in the list. If service
cannot be found on those channels, the user will be unregistered.
Hybrid
Attempts to search for systems on the given channels first, and
then opens the search up to all channels if none can be found.
Given this selection, the modem will also update the channel list
automatically with any channel on which it has found service. In
this way, the channel list is eventually updated with all CDPD
systems in the area.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Status Screen
The Status screen shows modem information which is updated every 3 seconds.This
screen was designed to assist support personnel in diagnosing problems with your modem.
If a problem develops, the Symbol Support Center (Refer to Symbol Support Centers on
page -xix for contact information) will find the information displayed here of importance.
Note:There are no menus on this screen and no place for user entry.
Tapping Done will return you to the Quick Status screen.
CDPD Entry identifies the current CDPD acquisition state.
SEARCH
ACQ'D
The modem is searching for service.
The modem has acquired or synchronized to a CDPD system in
the area.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Setup
RSSI Entry is the signal strength measured on the current channel. During the SEARCH
phase of operation, this value may vary according to the channel on which an attempt will
be made. When ACQ'D, the signal strength measurement should remain somewhat
constant.
Color
Chan
Area color code being transmitted by the CDPD system.
The current channel. During the SEARCH phase, this value may
change according to the channel that is being attempted. Once a
channel has been ACQ'D, this should remain relatively constant.
CellID
BLER
CDPD Base Station identifier number.
A measurement of the error rate on the forward channel detected by
the modem.
Side
Display of the current Side, given the A/B side distribution of the CDPD
channels.
PL
The current Power Level value at which transmission will take place.
The current CDPD Base Station Service Provider Identifier.
The current CDPD Base Station Wide Area Service Identifier.
The current CDPD Base Station Service Provider Network Identifier.
The Power Product value transmitted by the current CDPD system.
SPI
WASI
SPNI
PwrProd
RegErr
A numeric value representing the last registration error encountered. A
value of 1-7 indicates an error; a value of 0 indicates no error and a
value of 255 indicates no registration attempt was made.
Link
Identifies the current CDPD communication link state. Can be Locked
or Searching.
IP is the IP address of the unit.
EID is the Equipment ID of the unit.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Terminal Screen
The Terminal provides an internal terminal emulator for communication with the modem,
allowing users to further customize the operation of their modem based on the AT
command set.
To begin a terminal session:
1. Tap the Online button.
Going online terminates any active network session and establishes a serial
session to the modem.
The screen shows the data that is being received from the modem. As data is
received, it is displayed line by line on the screen display. Scroll bars automatically
display when the amount of displayed data exceeds the physical size of the SPT
1733 terminal’s total display area. You can scroll back and forth through most of the
previously displayed data. There is a physical limitation on how much previous data
can be scrolled and once this limitation is reached, the oldest data will be
overwritten, so the screen buffer always maintains the last 2000 bytes of data from
the modem.
2. Tap Offline button to close the serial session.
3. Tap Done to terminate any serial session and re-establish a network session,
returning you to the Quick Status screen.
4. Tap the Clear button to clear the current screen buffer.
At the bottom of the screen is a field for entry of an AT command. There are a number
of pre-defined commands that are included in the Cmd pick list. When you selection of
any of these commands, the modem will automatically send the command, without the
need to press Send button.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Setup
Ping Screen
From this screen you can send a PING request to another network device whose network
address you already know. This is useful to verify network connectivity.
As with other PING applications, you must enter the IP address of the other network device
in the IP field and then select the desired payload size. Pressing the Send button will send
the PING. A status line will provide information on whether or not the PING was successful
by displaying a "Success" or "Fail" message. There is a 20 second timeout for a response
before a "Success" or "Fail" message may display.
Please note that there are some limitations on this PING implementation:
•
•
The size of PING payload is limited to 99 bytes. If a payload of greater than that is
entered, a data error message will be displayed.
The delay to wait for response is fixed at 20 seconds.
After you have viewed this information, press the OK button to return to the Quick Status
screen.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Help Menu
The Help menu shows basic information about your modem, modem driver, and Merlin
application.
Modem Info
Displays the Quick Status screen. Refer to 2-13 for
details.
Driver Info
About
Displays the version of the modem driver.
Displays version and copyright information for Merlin.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Setup
Configuring a GSM WAN Connection (SPT 1734
Only)
To set up a new connection configuration:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
3. Tap the
icon to open the Applications Launcher.
icon to open the HotSync application.
icon to display the HotSync Options menu and select Connection
Setup.The Connection Preferences screen displays:
4. Tap New to create a new configuration. The Edit screen displays:
5. Enter a name for the connection (i.e., GSM modem) and select GSM Driver to
Modem as the Connection Method.
Refer to Preparing Your SPT 1700 Terminal for a Modem HotSync Operation on
page 9-15 for additional information about this screen.
6. Tap the OK button, followed by the Done button.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Changing the Applications Launcher Display Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Switching Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Setting Preferences for Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Displaying Applications by Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Writing Graffiti with the Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Practicing Graffiti with the Memo Pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Writing Letters With Graffiti. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Writing Numbers With Graffiti. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Writing Punctuation Marks With Graffiti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Writing Symbols and Extended Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Writing Accented Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Accent Strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Additional Non-English Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Navigation Strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Graffiti ShortCuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Using the On-Screen Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Using Application Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Using Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Choosing a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Graffiti Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Edit Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Choosing Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Using Categories in Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Defining a New Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Renaming Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Attaching Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Marking Private Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Beaming Information to Other SPT 1700 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Scanning with the SPT 1700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Introduction
This chapter explains how to open applications, use the on-screen keyboard, write with the
stylus, perform scanning, and use common features on your SPT 1700 terminal.
Applications
Your SPT 1700 terminal is equipped with a variety of applications which display in the
Applications Launcher. Use the Applications Launcher to open any application installed on
your SPT 1700 terminal. You can also open the four main applications — Date Book,
Address Book, To Do List and Memo Pad — with the buttons on the front panel of your SPT
1700 terminal.
Tip: The buttons on the front panel provide instant access to the selected
application. You don’t need to turn on your SPT 1700 terminal first.
The Applications Launcher also displays the current time, battery level and application
category.
To open applications:
1. Tap the
Launcher.
icon on the SPT 1700 terminal screen to open the Applications
2. Tap the icon of the application that you want to open. If you have many applications
installed on your SPT 1700 terminal, tap the scroll bar to see all of your
applications.
Tip: As a shortcut, write the Graffiti® handwriting software character stroke for the
first letter of the application you want to use. The Applications Launcher scrolls to
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
the first application that begins with that letter. Refer to Writing Capital Letters With
Graffiti on page 3-12 for additional information.
Changing the Applications Launcher Display Format
By default the Applications Launcher displays each application as an icon. As an
alternative, you can choose to show a list of applications.
To change the Applications Launcher display:
1. Tap the
Launcher.
2. Tap the
icon on the SPT 1700 terminal screen to open the Applications
icon to open the Applications Launcher menus.
3. Tap Preferences from the Options menu to open the Preferences screen.
4. Tap the View By pick list and select the List option.
Note:Tap the Remember Last Category checkbox to display only the last
category of applications that you have selected.
5. Tap the OK button to close the Preferences screen and display the Applications
Launcher in list format.
Switching Applications
When working in any application, you can tap the
icon or press the buttons on the front
panel to switch to any other application. Your SPT 1700 terminal saves your work in the
current application and displays it when you return to the current screen.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Setting Preferences for Applications
You can set preferences for individual applications in the Preferences screen. Not all
applications have preference settings.
To set preferences for an application:
1. Open an application.
2. Tap the Menu icon.
3. From the Options menu, select Preferences.
4. Enter the desired preference settings; then tap OK.
Displaying Applications by Category
The category feature enables you to limit the number of applications that display on the
screen. You can assign your applications to categories and then choose to display a single
category or all your applications.
To display applications by category:
1. Tap the
Launcher.
2. Tap the
icon on the SPT 1700 terminal screen to open the Applications
icon to open the Applications Launcher menus.
3. Tap Category from the App menu to open the Category screen.
4. Tap the pick list next to each application to assign it to a category.
Tip: To create a new category, tap Edit Category from the pick list to open the Edit
Categories screen. Tap the New button, enter the category name, and then tap the
OK button to add the category. Tap OK to close the Edit Categories screen.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
5. Tap the Done button to close the Category screen and return to the Applications
Launcher.
6. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen and select the application
category you want to display.
Tip: You can also tap the
icon to scroll through the application categories.
Writing Graffiti with the Stylus
Your SPT 1700 terminal includes Graffiti handwriting software as the primary system for
entering text and numbers. Graffiti is a system where simple strokes you write with the
stylus are instantly recognized as letters or numbers.
This section explains the basics of Graffiti, and how to make strokes in the Graffiti writing
writing Graffiti. Refer to Installing Games on page 19-6 for instructions on how to install
Giraffe.
Practicing Graffiti with the Memo Pad
The Memo Pad application is ideal for practicing the Graffiti alphabet. This section explains
how to open the Memo Pad and use it to practice Graffiti. A complete explanation of the
Memo Pad application appears in Chapter 13, Applications: Memo Pad.
To open the Memo Pad application:
1. Press the
application.
button on the front of your SPT 1700 terminal to open the Memo Pad
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal
2. Tap the New button to open a new Memo Page.
New
memo
cursor
Tap
New
Write in Graffiti area
Note:A cursor displays in the upper-left corner of the Memo Page to
indicate where new text will display.
Writing Letters With Graffiti
Most people find they can enter text quickly and accurately with only minutes of practice.
Graffiti includes any character you can type on a standard keyboard. The Graffiti strokes
closely resemble those of the regular alphabet which makes it quick and easy to learn. For
example, the following Graffiti strokes are portions of the regular alphabet equivalents.
K
5
A
F
4
T
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
There are four basic concepts for success with Graffiti:
•
Draw the character shape exactly as shown in the tables later in this chapter (like
the shapes shown in the following diagram).
•
•
•
The heavy dot on each shape shows where to begin the stroke. Certain characters
have similar shapes, but different begin and end points. Always begin the stroke at
the heavy dot. (Do not draw the heavy dot; it is there only as a guideline).
Most characters require only a single stroke. When you lift the stylus from the
Graffiti writing area, your SPT 1700 terminal recognizes and displays the text
character immediately.
The Graffiti writing area is divided into two parts: one for writing the letters of the
alphabet and one for writing numbers. The small marks at the top and bottom of
the Graffiti writing area indicate the two areas.
Write letters here
Write numbers here
Division marks
To write letters of the alphabet with Graffiti:
1. Tap the screen where you want to write your text (an entry in your Data Book, an
e-mail address, etc.).
Note:A blinking cursor must display onscreen above the Graffiti writing
area before you can begin writing text.
2. Use the The Graffiti Alphabet on page 3-11 to find the stroke shape for the letter
you want to create. For example, the stroke shown below creates the letter “n.”
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Note:There are two different stroke shapes available for some letters. For
these letters, choose the one that’s easiest for you.
Lift stylus here
Start stroke at
heavy dot
As you’ll see later, you use these shapes to create both upper- and lowercase
letters.
3. Position the stylus in the left-hand side of the Graffiti writing area.
4. Start your stroke at the heavy dot, and draw the stroke shape as it displays in the
table.
Note:Don’t try to draw the dot shape itself. The heavy dot is there to show
the starting point of the stroke.
5. Lift the stylus from the screen at the end of the stroke shape.
That’s all there is to it! When you lift the stylus from the screen, your SPT 1700 terminal
recognizes your stroke immediately and prints the letter at the insertion point on the screen.
As soon as you lift the stylus from the screen, you can begin the stroke for the next
character you want to write.
Caution
You must make the character strokes in the Graffiti writing area or your
SPT 1700 terminal does not recognize them as text characters.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Graffiti Tips
When writing with Graffiti, keep these tips in mind:
•
•
Accuracy improves when you write large characters. Draw strokes that nearly fill
the Graffiti writing area.
To delete characters, simply set the insertion point to the right of the character you
want to delete and make the backspace stroke (a line from right to left) in the Graffiti
writing area.
•
•
Write at natural speed. Writing too slowly can generate recognition errors.
Do not write on a slant. Vertical strokes should be parallel to the sides of the Graffiti
writing area.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Carriage
Return
Period
tap twice
Writing Capital Letters With Graffiti
Note:Make capital letters with the same stroke shapes as the basic
alphabet characters. First “shift” to caps — just as you press the
Shift key on a keyboard — and then write the character strokes.
Graffiti includes a Smart Shifting feature which automatically
capitalizes the first letter when you create a new entry (by tapping a
New button or a blank line).
To draw the first letter of a word as a capital letter use the Caps Shift stroke:
Caps
Shift
Tip: When Caps Shift is active, an “up arrow” symbol displays in the lower-right
corner of the SPT 1700 terminal screen.
To enter only capital letters (Caps Lock) use the Caps Lock stroke:
Caps
Lock
Tip: When Caps Lock is active, an underlined “up arrow” symbol displays in the
lower-right corner of the SPT 1700 terminal screen. To return to lowercase, make
the Caps Shift stroke.
Writing Numbers With Graffiti
Writing numbers with Graffiti is similar to writing letters, except that you make the character
strokes on the right-hand side (numbers side) of the Graffiti writing area.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Graffiti Numbers
Number
Strokes
Number
Strokes
0
5
1
6
2
3
4
7
8
9
Writing Punctuation Marks With Graffiti
Graffiti can create any punctuation symbol that you can enter from a standard keyboard. All
punctuation marks begin with a single tap on the Graffiti writing area. When you make this
tap, you activate Punctuation Shift and a dot displays to show it is active. The next stroke
you make with the stylus creates a punctuation mark.
Punctuation shift
Symbol
Stroke
Symbol
Stroke
Period
.
Dash
—
Comma
,
Left Paren
(
Apostrophe
'
Right Paren
)
Question
?
Slash
/
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Exclamation
!
Dollar
$
Additional Graffiti Punctuation
@
#
%
^
&
*
~
<
>
–
+
"
=
|
\
{
}
[
]
`
;
:
tab
Note:When Punctuation Shift is active, you can make a symbol stroke
anywhere in the Graffiti writing area (the letters or numbers side).
Writing Symbols and Extended Characters
All symbols and extended characters begin with the stroke in the Graffiti writing area of your
SPT 1700:
Symbol
Shift
When the Symbol Shift is active, a slanted shift symbol displays in the lower-right corner of
the screen. The next stroke that you make creates the symbol or extended character.
•
?
!
+
–
=
c
:
Y
=
X
ƒ
∅
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Writing Accented Characters
To create accented characters, draw the stroke normally used to letter, followed by an
accent stroke. Graffiti then adds the accent to the letter.
For example, the following diagram shows the strokes required to draw an accented “e.”
= e
Accent Strokes
a
a
a
a
a
a
Using these accent strokes, you can write the following accented letters:
à á â ã ä å è é ê ‘ “ ’ ” • ò — ô õ ö ù ú û ü – ÿ n ∆ ñ
Additional Non-English Characters
You can write the following characters in the lowercase alphabet mode without any special
punctuation or shifting:
c
a
e
Note:You must write these non-English characters in the left side of the
Graffiti writing area.
Navigation Strokes
In addition to character symbols, Graffiti includes special strokes that you can use to
navigate within text or fields in your SPT 1700 terminal applications.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Navigation Command
Move cursor right
Stroke
Move cursor left
Previous field
(Address Book only)
Next Field
(Address Book only)
Open Address Record
(Address Book only)
Graffiti ShortCuts
Graffiti’s ShortCuts are similar to the Glossary or Autotext features of some word
processors and make entering commonly used words or phrases quick and easy.
Graffiti comes with several predefined ShortCuts, and you can also create your own. Each
ShortCut can represent up to 45 characters. For example, you might create a ShortCut for
your name, or for the header of a memo. Refer to ShortCuts Preferences on page 14-29 to
learn about creating your own ShortCuts.
To use a ShortCut, draw the ShortCut stroke followed by the ShortCut characters. When
you draw the ShortCut stroke, the ShortCut symbol displays at the insertion point to show
that you are in ShortCut mode.
ShortCut
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Your SPT 1700 terminal includes the following predefined Graffiti ShortCuts:
Entry
ShortCut
Date stamp
Time stamp
Date / time stamp
Meeting
ds
ts
dts
me
br
Breakfast
Lunch
lu
Dinner
di
For example, to enter the current date and time, draw the following strokes:
Using the On-Screen Keyboard
You can activate the on-screen keyboard any time you need to enter text or numbers on
your SPT 1700 terminal as an alternative to Graffiti. Note that you cannot enter Graffiti
characters while using the on-screen keyboard.
To use the on-screen keyboard:
1. Open any SPT 1700 terminal application (such as the Memo Pad application, as
described in the previous section).
2. Tap any record name, or tap the New button.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
3. Tap the left target to open the Alpha keyboard, or tap the right target to open the
Numeric keyboard.
Tap here for numbers
Tap here for letters
keyboard
keyboard
Alpha
Tab
Backspace
Caps lock
Caps shift
Carriage return
Tap here to display
Alpha keyboard
Numeric
International
Tap here to display
International keyboard
Tap here to display
Numeric keyboard
4. Tap the characters of the on-screen keyboard to enter text and numbers.
Note:The on-screen keyboard also includes a dialog for international
characters. You can switch among the three dialogs at any time to
enter the exact text you need.
After you finish, tap the Done button to close the on-screen keyboard and place the text in
your SPT 1700 terminal application.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Using Application Controls
SPT 1700 applications include several types of controls. Once you become familiar with
these controls, you can easily select options and navigate through your SPT 1700 terminal
applications. The following table lists the controls and how to use them.
Check box. When a check mark displays in a check
box, the corresponding option is active. If a check
box is empty, tap it to insert a check mark. If a check
box is checked, tapping it removes the check mark.
Scroll arrows.Tap the up arrow to display the
previous page of information, or tap the down arrow
to display the next page. These arrows perform the
same function as pressing the upper and lower
portions of the scroll button on the front panel of the
SPT 1700 terminal.
Pick list.Tap the arrow to display a list of choices,
and then tap an item on the list to select it.
Button.Tap a button to perform a command. Buttons
display with different text depending on their function.
In most cases, tapping a button opens or closes a
dialog. A dialog is a screen that displays on your SPT
1700 terminal, prompting you to enter information or
make settings. A dialog always contains an OK,
Cancel or Done button, so you can close the dialog
when you are through with it. The on-screen
keyboard is an example of a dialog.
Scroll bar. Drag the slider to scroll the display one
line at a time. To scroll to the previous page, tap the
arrow at the top of the scroll bar. To scroll to the next
page, tap the arrow at the bottom of the scroll bar.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Using Menus
Menus are a special set of commands available in most of your SPT 1700 terminal
applications (Memo Pad, Date Book, etc.). The exact commands that display in the menus
depend on the application that is currently running on your SPT 1700 terminal.
Some menu commands are common to all SPT 1700 terminal applications. These are
described in this section; other menu commands are described in the chapters about each
SPT 1700 terminal application.
To activate the menus:
1. Open an SPT 1700 terminal application (such as the Memo Pad, as described
earlier in this chapter).
2. Tap the
icon to open the menus for the application at the top of the screen.
Tap the Menus icon
In this example, three menus are available: Record, Edit and Options. The Record menu is
selected and contains the “New Memo,” “Delete Memo” and “Beam Memo” commands.
Choosing a Menu
After you activate the menus for an application, tap the menu that contains the command
you want to use.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal
The menus and menu commands available depend on the application currently running on
your SPT 1700 terminal, and vary depending on which part of the application is currently
on the screen. Using the Memo Pad application as an example, the menus are different for
the Memo List screen and the Memo screen.
Graffiti Menu Commands
Most menu commands have Graffiti “Command stroke” equivalents — similar to keyboard
commands on computers. The command letters display on the right side of the menu
commands.
To use the Graffiti menu commands, draw the Command stroke followed by the
corresponding command letter. When you draw the Command stroke, the Command
symbol displays just above the Graffiti writing area to indicate that you are in Command
mode.
Command
For example, to activate the Select All command in the previous diagram, draw the
Command stroke, followed by the letter “s.”
Note:You do not have to tap the
icon or access the menus when you
use the Graffiti menu commands. However, since the Command
mode is active for approximately two seconds, you must write the
letter character immediately to activate the menu command.
Edit Menu Commands
The Edit menu is available with any screen where you enter or edit text. In general, the Edit
Menu commands available in the Edit menu apply to text that you select in an application.
To select text in an application:
1. Tap the beginning of the text that you want to select.
2. Drag the stylus over the text to highlight it (in black).
Note:You can drag across the text to select additional words, or drag
down to select a group of lines.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
The following commands may display in an Edit menu:
Undo
Reverses the action of the last edit command.
For example, if you used the Cut command to
remove text, the Undo command replaces the
text you removed.
Cut
Removes the selected text and stores it
temporarily in the memory of your SPT 1700
terminal. You can paste the cut text into another
area of the application or into a different
application.
Copy
Paste
Copies the selected text and stores it temporarily
in the memory of your SPT 1700 terminal. You
can paste the copied text into another area of the
application or into a different application.
Inserts the text that you cut or copied at the
selected point in your SPT 1700 terminal
application. The Paste command replaces any
selected text. If you did not previously cut or copy
text, the Paste command does nothing.
Select All
Keyboard
Graffiti Help
Selects all of the text on the current record or
screen. This enables you to cut or copy all of the
text and paste it elsewhere.
Opens the on-screen keyboard. When you finish
with the on-screen keyboard, tap the Done
button.
Opens the dialogs that show the Graffiti character
strokes. Use this command any time you forget a
stroke for a particular character.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Choosing Fonts
In most of your SPT 1700 terminal applications, you can change the font style to make the
text on the screen easier to read. You can even choose a different font style for each
application that supports this feature.
Note:The Expense application does not support changing fonts.
To change the font style:
1. Open a SPT 1700 terminal application.
2. Tap the
icon to open the menus at the top of the screen.
3. Tap Font from the Options menu to open the Select Font screen.
Tap here for large font
Tap here for bold font
Tap here for small font
4. Tap the font style you want to use.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
5. Tap the OK button to close the screen and return to the application with the new
font style.
Small font
Large font
Bold font
Using Categories
Categories can help you group Address entries, To Do items, Memos, and Expense
application records for easy review. You cannot, however, assign categories to Date Book
events.
When you first create an entry, it is automatically assigned to the currently displayed
category. For example, if a record is created while the Personal category is displayed, the
record is assigned to the Personal category. If a record is created while the All category is
displayed, it will be designated as “Unfiled,” which means it does not belong to any
particular category. You can leave an entry as Unfiled or assign it to a category at any time.
Either way, the entry is always available until you delete it. The category you choose is used
only for sorting and reviewing records, and does not affect the actual contents of the record.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Note:The use of categories is optional. You do not need to assign
categories to use SPT 1700 terminal applications.
To assign a category to an entry:
1. Tap a To Do item, Memo, Expense record or an Address Book entry.
2. Tap the Details button to open the Details screen (for an Address Book entry, you
then tap the Edit button).
3. Tap the Category pick list to display a list of available categories.
4. Tap the category that you want to assign to the entry.
5. Tap the OK button to close the Details screen and activate your setting.
Using Categories in Lists
After you assign categories to your entries, you can easily display lists of your entries by
category.
To use categories in a List screen:
1. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the List screen.
Tap here
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
2. Tap the category of entries that you want to view. The List screen changes to show
only the records filed in that selected category.
3. Repeat the previous steps, and tap All in the category pick list to restore the list of
all Address Book entries.
Tip: Pressing the application button on the front panel of the SPT 1700 terminal
toggles through the available categories.
Defining a New Category
Your SPT 1700 terminal comes with two default categories: Business and Personal. In
addition, the Address Book contains the QuickList category, designed as a “quick
reference” of commonly used names, addresses and phone numbers (such as doctor,
lawyer, etc.).
You can change the names of these default categories, or add new categories to suit your
needs. You can define up to 15 categories for each application.
To define a new Address Book category:
1. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen.
Tap here
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal
2. Tap the Edit Categories item to open the Edit Categories screen.
3. Tap the New button to open another Edit Categories screen.
4. Enter the name of the new category, and tap the OK button to close the Edit
Categories screen.
5. Tap the OK button to close the first Edit Categories screen and view your new
category in the pick list.
Note:You can edit any of your records and file them in the new categories
as appropriate.
Renaming Categories
You can also use the Edit Categories screen to change the names of any existing category.
To change the name of an Address Book category:
1. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
2. Tap the Edit Categories item to open the Edit Categories screen.
3. Tap the category that you want to rename, then tap the Rename button to open
another Edit Categories screen.
4. Enter the new name that you want to assign to the category, and tap the OK button
to close the Edit Categories screen.
5. Tap the OK button to close the first Edit Categories screen and view the new name
in the pick list.
Note:You can “merge” two or more Categories by assigning them the
same name. For example, if you change the name of the “Personal”
category to the name “Business,” all entries formerly in the Personal
category display in the Business category.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Attaching Notes
SPT 1700 terminal applications (except the Memo Pad) enable you to attach a note to an
entry. A note is anything that you want to write, and can be up to several thousand
characters long. For example, if you have an appointment in the Date Book application, you
could attach a note with directions to the location.
To attach a note to an entry:
1. Display the entry where you want to add a note.
2. Tap the Details button to open the Details screen.
Note:In the Address Book only, the Edit button is used.
3. Tap the Note button to open the Note screen.
4. Write Graffiti character strokes or the on-screen keyboard for the text you want to
appear in the note. Use the Carriage Return stroke to move down to new lines in
the note.
5. Tap the Done button to close the note and return to the application screen. A note
icon displays at the right side of any item that has a note attached. To review or edit
a note, tap the
confirm.
icon. To delete a note, tap the
icon, Delete, and then Yes to
Note icon
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Marking Private Entries
In SPT 1700 terminal applications you can mark individual entries as Private. Private
entries remain visible and accessible until you change the Security setting to hide all Private
entries. Refer to Chapter 15, Applications: Security for complete information about how to
activate and use the SPT 1700 terminal Security settings.
To mark an entry as Private:
1. Display the entry that you want to mark as Private.
2. Tap the Details button to open the Details screen.
3. Select the Private check box to insert a check mark and mark the entry as Private.
The Private Records screen displays:
Beaming Information to Other SPT 1700 Terminals
Your SPT 1700 terminal is equipped with an IR (infrared) port that can “beam” information
to other compatible printers and terminals. The IR port is located on the back of the
terminal. Refer to Parts of the SPT 1700 on page 1-4 for the exact location of the IR port.
Note:If you are using a device other than an SPT 1700 terminal, confirm
that your device includes the required infrared hardware before you
You can beam the following information between SPT 1700 terminals:
•
•
•
The current Address Book, Date Book, To Do List or Memo Pad entry
All the Address Book, To Do List or Memo Pad entries in the current category
A special Address Book entry which you designate as a “business card” (refer to
Beaming Address Entries to Other SPT 1700 Terminals on page 5-10 for details).
•
An application installed in RAM memory.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal
To beam information:
1. Locate the entry, category, business card or application you want to beam.
2. Tap the icon.
3. Tap the Beam command from the Record menu to open the Beam Status screen.
4. Point the IR port directly at the IR port of the receiving SPT 1700 terminal.
Tip: SPT 1700 terminals transmit data at varying distances up to three ft.,
depending on lighting conditions when IR is activated. For best results, the IR
windows should be aligned and clear of obstacles.
5. Wait for the Beam Status screen to indicate that the transfer is complete before you
continue working on your SPT 1700 terminal.
To receive beamed information:
1. Turn on your SPT 1700 terminal.
2. Point the IR port directly at the IR port of the transmitting SPT 1700 terminal to open
the Beam Status screen.
3. Tap the Yes button to accept the transmission.
4. Wait for the Beam Status screen to indicate that the transfer is complete, then tap
the OK button to display the new entry.
Note:Incoming entries are filed under the “Unfiled” category.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
To turn beaming off:
1. Tap the Applications icon, then Prefs.
2. In the pick list in the upper right corner, pick General.
The Beam Receive pick list gives you the options of On or Off.
Scanning with the SPT 1700
The SPT 1700 has an integrated laser bar code scanner which, if your unit is configured to
use scanning input, allows you to collect data by scanning bar codes.
To scan bar codes with the SPT 1700:
1. Start your scanning application.
2. Aim the scanner at the bar code.
3. Press either the right, left or center scan trigger. Make sure the red scan beam
covers the entire bar code. The green scan LED lights and a beep sounds to
indicate a successful decode.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Finding Information With Your SPT 1700
Terminal
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Using the Find Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Using Phone Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Phone Lookup Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding Information With Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Introduction
This chapter explains how to locate information on your SPT 1700 terminal with the Find
command and the Phone Lookup command.
Using the Find Command
The Find command locates any text that you specify and is available in any SPT 1700
terminal application. You can search for whole words or the beginning letters of a word. The
Find command searches all the data on your SPT 1700 terminal and lists which
applications contain the text.
For example, suppose you want to find a particular name, but aren’t sure where you stored
it. The Find command immediately lists all instances of that name and enables you to jump
directly to the name.
To use the Find command:
1. Tap the
icon from any SPT 1700 terminal application to open the Find screen.
Tip: If you select text in an application before you tap the Find button, the selected
text automatically displays in the Find screen.
2. Enter the text that you want to find in your SPT 1700 terminal.
Note:The Find command is not case-sensitive. In other words, searching
for the name “davidson” also finds “Davidson.” The Find command
also searches the contents of notes.
3. Tap the OK button to display a list of all instances of the text that you specified.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Note:As your SPT 1700 terminal searches for the text, you can tap the
Stop button to stop the search at any time. For instance, if the entry
you want displays before your SPT 1700 terminal finishes the
search. To continue the search after you tap Stop, tap the Find More
button.
4. Tap the text that you want to review. The selected entry and its corresponding SPT
1700 terminal application display on the screen.
Using Phone Lookup
In addition to using the Find feature to locate text, you can search for and display phone
numbers with the Phone Lookup menu command. After you find a phone number, you can
paste it directly into an SPT 1700 terminal application.
For example, if you want to include a phone number in a memo, use the Phone Lookup
feature to find the phone number and transfer it directly into the memo.
To use the Phone Lookup command:
1. Display the entry where you want to insert a phone number. This can be an event
in the Date Book, a To Do List Item or a memo in the Memo Pad application.
Note:The Phone Lookup feature is not available in the Address Book and
Expense applications.
2. Tap the
icon to open the menus for your application.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding Information With Your SPT 1700 Terminal
3. Tap Phone Lookup from the Options menu to display the Phone Number Lookup
screen.
4. Tap the phone number you want to use.
Note:To find a phone number more quickly, you can enter the first letter of
the name you want to find in the Look Up line at the bottom of the
screen. The list scrolls to the first name that starts with that letter.
You can continue to add letters to narrow your search.
5. Tap the Add button to close the Phone Number Lookup screen and paste the name
and phone number you selected into the entry selected in step 1.
Phone Lookup Tips
You can also use the Graffiti Command stroke “/L” to activate the Phone Lookup feature.
•
You can use Phone Lookup while entering text. For example, to insert the full name
and phone number for someone with the last name “Williams,” write the Graffiti
characters for “Wi”, then the Phone Lookup Command stroke “/L.”
Assuming you have only one Address Book entry that begins with “Wi,” your SPT
1700 terminal inserts the full name “Williams” (and the corresponding phone
number). If you have more than one name that begins with “Wi,” the Phone Lookup
screen displays.
•
The Phone Lookup feature also works for selected text. Drag to highlight the text,
and then write the Phone Lookup Command stroke “/L.” Your SPT 1700 terminal
replaces the selected text and adds the phone number to the name that it finds.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Opening the Address Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Address Book Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Creating an Address Book Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Deleting an Address Book Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Duplicating an Address Book Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Working with Address Book Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Beaming Address Entries to Other SPT 1700 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Address Book Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Record Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Address Book
Introduction
The Address Book enables you to keep names, addresses, phone numbers and other
information about your personal or business contacts.
With the Address Book, you can:
•
•
Quickly look up or enter names, addresses, phone numbers and other information.
Enter up to five phone numbers (home, work, fax, car, etc.) or e-mail addresses for
each name.
•
•
•
Define which phone numbers appear in the Address List screen for each Address
Book entry.
Attach a note to each Address Book entry where you can enter additional
information about the entry.
Assign categories to your Address Book entries, so you can quickly sort and view
them in logical groups.
Opening the Address Book
To open the Address Book:
1. Press the Address Book button on the front panel of the SPT 1700 terminal to open
the Address Book and display a record list.
Address Book
Tip: Press the Address Book button repeatedly to cycle through the categories in
which you have records.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Address Book Entries
An Address Book entry is where you store name and address information about people or
entries.
Creating an Address Book Entry
You can create Address Book entries on your SPT 1700 terminal, or use the Symbol Palm
Terminal Desktop software to create Address Book entries on your computer and download
the entries to your SPT 1700 terminal with the next HotSync operation. Refer to Chapter 9,
Applications: HotSync® for details.
Note:The Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software also has data import
capabilities that enable you to load database files into the Address
Book on your SPT 1700 terminal. Refer to the online documentation
supplied with the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software for
details.
To create a new Address Book entry:
1. Press the
List screen.
button on the front of your SPT 1700 terminal to display the Address
2. Tap the New button to display the Address Edit screen.
Cursor
at Last
name
Tap New
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Address Book
3. Enter the last name of the person you want to add to your Address Book.
Note:Your SPT 1700 terminal automatically capitalizes the first letter of
each field (except numeric and e-mail fields). You do not have to use
the Graffiti capital stroke to capitalize the first letter of the name.
4. Tap the Last Name selected field.
5. Enter the person's information in that field.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter the other information that you want to include in this
Address Book entry.
7. Tap the arrows to move to the next page of information.
8. After you finish entering information, tap the Done button to return to the Address
List screen.
Note:You can also attach a note to an entry simply by tapping Note and
entering the necessary information.
Tap Done
Tip: You can create an Address Book entry that always displays at the top of the
list by beginning the Last name (or Company name) field with a blank space. For
example, you might create an “If Found Call” entry that contains your name and
phone number in case you lose your SPT 1700 terminal.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Deleting an Address Book Entry
Use the Menu Commands (described in Record Menu on page 5-12) or the Address Entry
Details screen to delete an entry.
To delete an entry with the Address Entry Details screen:
1. Tap the Address Book entry that you want to delete to display the Address View
screen for that entry.
2. Tap the Edit button to display the Address Edit screen.
3. Tap the Details button to open the Event Details screen.
4. Tap the Delete button to open the Delete Address alert.
5. Tap the OK button to confirm you want to delete the entry.
Duplicating an Address Book Entry
You can duplicate existing entries, which can be helpful when you want to enter multiple
people from a single organization. When you duplicate an entry, the word Copy displays
next to the name in the First Name field.
To duplicate an entry:
1. Tap the name you want to duplicate.
2. Perform one of the following:
•
Tap the Address Edit tab at the top of the screen; then tap Duplicate Record in
the Record menu.
•
In the Graffiti text area of your device’s screen, drag a diagonal line from the
lower left to upper right to display the Command toolbar; then write a T in the
Graffiti text area to initiate the Duplicate Record command.
3. Edit the record as necessary.
Working with Address Book Entries
Your SPT 1700 terminal enables you to quickly find your Address Book entries, group them
by category, and display the entries by name or company name. You can also choose the
type of information you want your entries to include and exchange Address Book
information with other SPT 1700 terminal users.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Address Book
Looking Up Address Book Entries
When working with the Address Book, the scroll button on the front panel of the SPT 1700
terminal makes it easy to navigate among your address entries. In the Address List screen,
the scroll button moves up or down an entire screen of address entries. If you hold down
the scroll button, you accelerate the scrolling so that it displays every third screen. In the
Address View screen, the scroll button moves to the previous or next address entry.
You can also use the Address List Look Up feature to quickly scroll to any of your Address
Book entries.
To look up an Address Book entry:
1. Display the Address List screen.
2. Enter the first letter of the name you want to find.
Look Up line
Note:The letter displays on the Look Up line and the list scrolls to the first
entry that begins with that letter. If you write another letter, the list
scrolls to the first entry that starts with those two letters. For
example, writing an “s” might scroll to “Sands,” and writing “sm”
might scroll further to “Smith.” If you sort the list by company name,
the Look Up feature scrolls to the first letter of the company name.
3. Tap any entry to view its contents, or use the carriage return stroke to view the
selected entry.
Choosing Types of Phone Numbers
Your SPT 1700 terminal enables you to choose the types of phone numbers or e-mail
addresses that you associate with an Address Book entry. Any changes you make apply
only to the current Address Book entry.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
To choose other types of phone numbers in an Address Book entry:
1. Tap the Address Book entry.
2. Tap the Edit button to display the Address Edit screen for that entry.
3. Tap the pick list next to the label you want to change.
Tap triangle
4. Tap the new label you want to use.
Assigning Address Categories
Categories can help you file individual Address Book entries into groups for easy review.
You can assign and edit categories in the Address Book or by using the Categories pick list
in the Details screen (Refer to Using Categories on page 3-24 for a complete description
of categories).
To assign a category to an Address Book entry:
1. Tap the Address Book entry you want to assign to a category.
2. Tap the Edit button in the Address View screen to display the Address Edit screen.
3. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner and tap the category that you want to
assign to the Address Book entry.
Sorting by Name or Company
You can sort the entries in the Address List screen by Company and Last Name, rather than
by Last Name and First Name. These settings do not change your Address Book data; they
merely change the view.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Address Book
To sort the entries in the Address List screen:
1. Display the Address List screen.
2. Tap the
icon to open the Address Book menus.
3. Tap Preferences from the Options menu to open the Address Book Preferences
screen.
4. Tap the setting that you want for the Address List screen.
5. Tap the OK button to display the Address List screen with your new setting.
Note:Entries with no company name sort by last name.
Editing Address Entry Details
The Address Entry Details screen provides a variety of options that you can associate with
an Address entry.
To open the Address Entry Details screen:
1. Tap an Address Book entry to display the Address View screen for that entry.
2. Tap the Edit button to display the Address Edit screen.
3. Tap the Details button to open the Address Entry Details screen.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
4. Select any of the following settings:
Show in List Choose which type of phone or other information displays on the
Address List screen for the current entry. Your options are: Work,
Home, Fax, Other and E-mail.
Category
Assign the entry to a particular category. Your options are: Business,
Personal, QuickList, Unfiled and Edit Categories.
Private
Hide this entry when the security features are turned on.
Beaming Address Entries to Other SPT 1700 Terminals
The IR port on your SPT 1700 terminal enables you to beam the following Address Book
entries to other SPT 1700 terminals:
•
•
•
Business card. A specially designated entry containing information you want to
exchange with business contacts. You can send your business card quickly with
one-touch beaming.
who also uses an SPT 1700 terminal.
Category of address entries. All entries assigned to the selected category. For
example, you might want to share your list of restaurants with a friend.
Note:For more on the IR port, refer to Beaming Information to Other SPT
1700 Terminals on page 3-30.
To select a business card:
1. Create an Address Book entry containing the information you want on your
business card.
2. Tap your business card entry to display the Address View screen for that entry.
3. Tap the
icon to open the Address Book menus.
4. Tap Select Business Card from the Record menu, and tap Yes to accept this entry
as your business card.
To beam a business card:
1. Tap your business card entry to display the Address View screen for that entry.
2. Tap the
icon to open the Address Book menus.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Address Book
3. Tap Beam Business Card from the Record menu to beam your card to another SPT
1700 terminal.
Tip: You can press the
button for about two seconds to beam your card.
To beam the current entry:
1. Tap an Address Book entry that you want to beam to display the Address View
screen for that entry.
2. Tap the
icon to open the Address Book menus.
3. Tap Beam Address from the Record menu to beam the current entry to another
SPT 1700 terminal through the IR port.
Tip: You can set the full-screen pen stroke to beam the current entry. Refer to Pen
Preferences on page 14-5 for details.
To beam the current category:
1. Display the Address List screen.
2. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner and tap the category you want to beam to
display the entries in that category.
3. Tap the
icon to open the Address Book menus.
4. Tap Beam Category from the Record menu to beam the entries in the current
category to another SPT 1700 terminal through the IR port.
Address Book Menu Commands
The Address Book includes menu commands to make it fast and easy to perform common
file and editing tasks. This section explains the menu commands specific to the Address
Book.
Refer to Using Menus on page 3-20 for information about menu commands common to all
of your SPT 1700 terminal applications.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Record Menu
When you select the Record menu, its commands display on the screen. The menu
commands are slightly different depending on the current screen.
Address List
Address View
Delete Address Opens an alert screen prompting you to confirm deletion of the current
entry. Tap the OK button to delete the entry from your SPT 1700
terminal, or tap the Cancel button to close the alert screen and keep the
entry.
Note: By default, your SPT 1700 terminal removes the entry from the
Address Book, but retains a copy of the entry and transfers it to an
archive file on your computer the next time you perform a HotSync
operation. To remove the entry completely, clear the Save archive copy
on PC check box.
Attach Note
Delete Note
Opens the Address Book Note screen where you can create a Note for
the current entry.
Opens an alert screen prompting you to confirm deletion of the Note
attached to the entry. Tap the OK button to delete the Note, or tap the
Cancel button to close the alert screen and keep the note.
Beam Address Beams the current Address Book entry to another SPT 1700 terminal
through the IR port.
Beam Category Beams all Address Book entries in the current category to another SPT
1700 terminal through the IR port.
SelectBusiness Enables you to select the current Address Book entry as your business
Card
card. To beam your business card to other SPT 1700 terminals, use the
Beam Business Card command.
Beam Business Sends the current business card to another SPT 1700 terminal through
Card
the IR port. You can also initiate this command by holding down the
Address Book button for at least two seconds. This is a convenient way
to exchange business cards with other SPT 1700 terminal users.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Address Book
Options Menu
When you select the Options menu, its commands display on screen:
Address View
Address List
Font
Opens the Select Font screen where you can choose a different
font (text) style for your Address Book entries. Refer to
Choosing Fonts on page 3-23 for details.
Preferences
Opens the Address Book Preferences screen.
•
•
Remember last category. Determines how the
Address Book displays when you return from another
Palm application (Memo Pad, To Do List, etc.). If you
select this check box, the Address Book shows the last
category you selected. When you clear it, the Address
Book shows the address entries for all categories.
List By. Determines whether address entries sort by
last name, first name or by company name, last name
in the Address List screen.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Rename
Custom Fields
Enables you to define custom field names. Each Address Book
entry contains four “custom fields” that you can rename. Any
changes you make to the names of the custom fields display in
all of your Address Book entries.
About Address
Book
Shows version (revision) information for the Address Book
application.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Opening the Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Using the Calculator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Special Calculator Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Calculator Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Recent Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Calculator
Introduction
The Calculator enables you to perform basic mathematical calculations. You can also store
and retrieve values in the Calculator’s memory.
Opening the Calculator
To open the Calculator:
1. Tap the
icon.
Using the Calculator Screen
The Calculator performs general mathematical functions including addition, subtraction,
multiplication and division.
To use the Calculator screen, tap the Calculator buttons that appear on the screen.
Special Calculator Buttons
The Calculator includes several buttons to help you perform calculations.
Clears the last number you entered. Use this button if you make a
mistake while entering a number in the middle of a calculation. This
button enables you to re-enter the number without starting the
calculation over.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Clears the entire calculation to begin a new calculation.
Toggles the current number between a negative and positive value. If
you want to enter a negative number, enter the number first and then
press the +/- button.
Places the current number into Memory. Each new number you enter
with the M+ button is added to the total already stored in memory. The
number that you add can be either a calculated value, or any number
you enter by pressing the number buttons. Pressing this button has no
effect on the current calculation (or series of calculations); it merely
places the value into memory until it is recalled.
Recalls the stored value from memory and inserts it in the current
calculation.
Removes any value stored in the Calculator memory.
Calculator Menu Commands
The Calculator supports Copy and Paste commands. You can use these commands to
copy a value from the Calculator and paste it into another application on your SPT 1700
terminal. Similarly, you can copy values from other applications on your SPT 1700 terminal,
such as Expense, and paste the values into the Calculator. For additional information on
the Copy and Paste commands, refer to Using Menus on page 3-20.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Calculator
Recent Calculations
The Recent Calculations command enables you to review the last series of calculations,
and is particularly useful for confirming a series of “chain” calculations.
To display the Recent Calculations:
1. Tap the
icon to open the Calculator menus.
2. Tap Recent Calculations from the Options menu to display the Recent Calculations
screen.
3. When you finish reviewing the screen, tap the OK button to close the Recent
Calculations screen and return to the Calculator.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Opening the Date Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Using the Date Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Scheduling an Event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Rescheduling an Event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Setting an Alarm for an Event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Scheduling Repeating Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Marking a Private Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Deleting an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Changing the Date Book View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Working in Week View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Working in Month View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Working in Agenda View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Date Book Menu Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Record Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Date Book
Introduction
The Date Book enables you to quickly and easily schedule appointments or any kind of
activity associated with a time and date.
With the Date Book, you can:
•
•
Enter a description of your appointment and assign it to a specific time and date.
Schedule: events by time and /or date, repeating events such as weekly meetings,
and continuous events such as a three day conference.
•
•
Display a chart of your appointments for an entire week. The Week View feature
makes it easy to spot any potential scheduling overlaps or conflicts. They can also
be displayed by Day, Month, or Agenda.
Display a monthly calendar to quickly spot days where you have morning, lunch or
afternoon appointments.
•
•
Set an alarm to sound prior to the scheduled activity.
Create reminders for events that are based on a particular date, rather than time of
day. Birthdays and anniversaries are easy to track with your SPT 1700 terminal.
•
Attach notes to individual events for a description or clarification of the entry in your
Date Book.
Opening the Date Book
To open the Date Book, press the Date Book button on the front panel of the SPT 1700
terminal.
Date Book button
Tip: Press the Date Book button repeatedly to cycle through the Day, Week, Month
and Agenda Views.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Using the Date Book
Each entry in the Date Book is called an event, any kind of activity that you associate with
a day. When the Date Book screen first displays, it shows the current date and a list of times
for a normal business day. You can enter a new event on any of the available time lines.
Scheduling an Event
When you create an event, its description displays on the time line, and its duration is
automatically set to one hour. These are referred to as timed events. You can easily change
the start time and duration for any timed event.
You can also include events in your Date Book that occur on a particular date but have no
specific start or end times, such as birthdays, holidays and anniversaries. These are
referred to as untimed events. Untimed events display at the top of the Date Book screen
with a diamond in the time list. You can have several untimed events on a particular date.
To schedule a timed event for the current day:
1. Tap the time line that corresponds to your event in the Date Book screen.
Tap a time
Time bar
shows
duration
2. Use the stylus to write Graffiti character strokes (or use the on-screen keyboard) to
describe your event. You can enter up to 255 characters.
3. If your appointment is longer or shorter than an hour, tap the time of the event to
open the Set Time screen. If your appointment is one hour long, skip to step 7.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Date Book
Note:You can also open the Set Time screen to select a start time by
writing a number on the number side of the Graffiti writing area. No
event can be selected.
Tap the time
of an event
4. Tap the time columns on the right side of the Set Time screen to set the Start Time.
Tap to scroll to
earlier hours
Start Time
highlighted
Tap to change
hours
Tap to change
minutes
Tap to set an all
day meeting
Tap to scroll to
later hours
Tap to change a
timed event into
an untimed event
5. Tap the End Time box, and then tap the time columns to set the End Time.
6. Tap the OK button to confirm your selection and close the Set Time screen.
7. Tap a blank area of the screen to de-select the event. A vertical line displays next
to the time, indicating the duration of the event.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
To schedule a timed event for another day:
1. Select the date you want for the event by doing one of the following:
•
Tap the day of the week that you want in the Date Bar at the top of the Date
Book screen. If necessary, tap the Previous week or Next week scroll bars to
move to another week.
Previous
week
Next
week
Tap to select the day of
the current week
•
Tap the Go To button to open the Go to Date screen. Select a date by tapping
a year, month and day in the calendar.
Previous year
Next year
Tap to scroll to
earlier hours
Tap to scroll to
earlier hours
current date
•
Press the scroll button on the front panel of the SPT 1700 terminal to scroll to
another day. Press the upper half of the button to move to the previous day or
the lower half to move to the next day.
2. After you locate the date, follow the steps described in the previous section, To
schedule a timed event for the current day:
Note:You can also add Address Book information to an event using the
Phone lookup option. Refer to Using Phone Lookup on page 4-4 for
details.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Date Book
To schedule an untimed event:
1. Select the date that you want for the event as described in the previous section, To
schedule a timed event for another day:
2. Tap New to open the Set Time screen.
3. Tap OK, so that no start or end times are defined for the new event.
Note:You can also create a new untimed event by making sure no event
is selected, then writing letters in the Graffiti writing area.
4. Enter a description for the event (which displays at the top of the Date Book
screen).
New
untimed
event
No time
selected
5. Tap a blank area on the screen to de-select the untimed event.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Note:If you create an event and decide later that there is no particular start
or end time, you can easily change it to an untimed event. Tap the
time of the event in the Date Book screen, tap the No Time button,
then tap the OK button to confirm your selection and close the Set
Time screen.
Rescheduling an Event
You can easily make changes to your schedule with your SPT 1700 terminal.
To reschedule an event:
1. Tap the event (not the time of the event) you want to reschedule.
2. Tap the Details button to open the Event Details screen for that event.
3. To change the time, tap the Time box and select the new time as described earlier
in this chapter.
4. To change the date, tap the Date box and select the new date as described earlier
in this chapter.
5. Tap the OK button to close the Event Details screen and return to the Date Book
screen.
Setting an Alarm for an Event
The Alarm setting enables you to set an audible alarm for events in your Date Book. You
can set an alarm to sound minutes, hours or days before an event. When you set an alarm,
an
icon displays to the far right of the event with the alarm. When the alarm tone
sounds, a reminder message also displays on the SPT 1700 terminal screen.
The default Alarm setting is 5 minutes before the time of the event, but you can change this
to any number of minutes, hours or days.
To set an alarm for an event:
1. Tap the event to which you want to assign an alarm.
2. Tap the Details button to open the Event Details screen for that event.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Date Book
3. Select the Alarm check box in the Event Details screen to activate the alarm. (Refer
to Options Menu on page 7-19 for details about setting alarm options.)
Enter numeric
setting here
Tap here to
select alarm unit
4. Tap the Alarm units pick list to select Minutes, Hours or Days.
5. Select the “5” (default) and enter any number from 0 to 99 (inclusive) as the
numeric alarm setting.
6. Tap the OK button to close the Event Details screen and return to the Date Book
screen.
Note:You can set a silent alarm for an untimed event. In this case, the
alarm triggers at the specified period of minutes, hours or days
before midnight (beginning) of the day of the untimed event. No
audible alarm sounds for an untimed event; instead, the reminder
message displays on the screen of the SPT 1700 terminal.
For example, you could create a reminder for an untimed event that occurs on February
4th. If the alarm reminder is set for 5 minutes, the alarm reminder displays at 11:55 PM on
the night of February 3rd. The reminder remains on the screen until you turn on your SPT
1700 terminal and tap the OK button to dismiss it.
Once an alarm has gone off, you can dismiss the alarm for a 5 minute period using the
Snooze option.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
To dismiss an alarm using the Snooze option:
1. When the alarm goes off, the alarm screen displays:
Tap to delay the
alarm for 5 minutes
Scheduling Repeating Events
The Repeat function enables you to schedule events that recur at regular intervals. A
birthday is a good example of an event that repeats annually. Another example would be a
weekly guitar lesson that falls on the same day of the week and the same time of day. After
you enter a repeating event, a
icon displays to the far right of the event.
To schedule a repeating event:
1. Tap anywhere on the text of an event in the Date Book screen.
2. Tap the Details button to open the Event Details screen.
3. Tap the Repeat box in the Event Details screen to open the Change Repeat screen.
Tap the
Repeat
box
4. Tap Day, Week, Month or Year in the Change Repeat screen.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Date Book
5. Enter a number that corresponds to how often you want the event to repeat in the
“Every” area. For example, if you select Month and enter the number “2,” the event
repeats every other month.
Tap the
Month
box
6. If you want to specify an ending date for the repeating event, tap the End on pick
list and tap Choose Date. Use the Date Picker to select an end date.
7. Tap the OK button to close the Change Repeat screen and activate your settings.
Considerations for the Repeat Function
•
•
•
If you change the start date of a repeating event, your SPT 1700 terminal
calculates the number of days you have moved the event, then automatically
changes the end date to maintain the duration of the repeating event.
If you change the repeat interval (e.g., daily to weekly) of a repeating event, past
occurrences (prior to the day on which you change the setting) are left alone and
your SPT 1700 terminal creates a new repeating event.
If you change the date of an occurrence of a repeating event (e.g., from January
14th to January 15th) and apply the change to all occurrences, the new date
becomes the start date of the repeating event. Your SPT 1700 terminal adjusts the
end date to maintain the duration of the event.
•
•
If you change other repeat settings (e.g., time, alarm, private) of a repeating event
and apply the change to all occurrences, your SPT 1700 terminal creates a new
event. The start date of this new event is the day on which the setting is changed.
Past occurrences (prior to the day of the change) are left alone and not changed.
If you make a change to one occurrence of a repeating event (e.g., time), that
occurrence no longer shows the Repeat icon.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Marking a Private Event
You can designate a specific event as “private.” When you activate the Security features,
your SPT 1700 terminal hides all private entries and you must enter a password to display
them on the screen.
To mark an event as private:
1. Tap the event you want to mark as private.
2. Tap the Details button to open the Event Details screen for that event.
3. Select the Private check box.
4. Tap the OK button to close the Event Details screen and return to the Date Book
screen.
Deleting an Event
There are three ways to delete an event from the Date Book application: simply delete the
text of the event, use the Menu Commands (described in the Record Menu section later in
this chapter), or use the Event Details screen.
Note:If you delete the text of a repeating event, you delete all instances of
that event. If you use the Menu Command or the Event Details
screen, you can delete one occurrence of the event (as an
exception) or all occurrences.
To delete an event with the Event Details screen:
1. Tap anywhere in the text area of the event to delete.
2. Tap the Details button to open the Event Details screen.
3. Tap the Delete button to open the Delete Event alert.
4. Tap the OK button to confirm you want to delete the event.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Date Book
Changing the Date Book View
In addition to displaying the calendar for a specific day, you can also display your Date Book
by the week, month, and agenda.
To toggle through the different views, press the Date Book button repeatedly to display the
next view or select one of the Date Book View icons.
Date Book view icons
To display the current time tap the date in the Date Book title bar to display the current time.
Tap the date
Current time displays
Note:After a few seconds, the title bar reverts to show the date.
Working in Week View
The Week View shows a chart of your events for an entire week. This view lets you quickly
review your appointments and available time slots. The graphical display helps you spot
overlaps and conflicts in your schedule.
To display the Week View:
1. Tap the Week View button in the Date Book screen.
2. Tap the navigation controls to move forward or backward a week at a time, or to
display details of an event.
Note:The Week View also shows untimed events and events that are
before and after the range of times shown.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Next
week
Previous week
Bar indicates earlier event
Dot indicates untimed event
Bar indicates later event
Week View button
3. Tap any of the events to show a description of the event.
Event details
Tap to show event details.
Tips for Using Week View
•
•
•
To reschedule an event, tap and drag the event to a different time or day.
Tap a blank time on any day to move directly to that day with the Day View screen.
Tap any of the days and dates that display at the top of the Week View to move
directly to that day without selecting an event.
•
The Week View shows the time span defined by the Start Time and End Time in
the Date Book Preferences settings. If you have an event before or after this time
span, a bar displays at the top or bottom of that day's column, and these on-
screen scroll arrows display if your scheduled events go beyond the displayed time
range.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Date Book
Spotting Event Conflicts in Week View
With the ability to define specific start and end times for any event, it’s possible to schedule
events that overlap (an event that starts before a previous event finishes).
In this case, any event conflict (time overlap) displays in the Week View as overlapping
bars. The Day View displays bracketed bars to the left of the conflicting times.
Event
conflicts
Working in Month View
The Month View screen shows which days have events scheduled. Dots and lines in the
Month View indicate events, repeating events and untimed events.
Previous/next month
Dashed line indicates continuous event.
Dots on right side indicate events.
Dots below date indicate untimed events.
Month View button
Tips for Using Month View
•
Tap any day that displays in the Month View screen to move directly to that day with
the Day View screen.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
•
•
•
Tap the arrows at the top to move forward or backward a month.
When the Month View is on the screen, you can use the scroll button on the front
panel of the SPT 1700 terminal to move between months. Press the upper half of
the button to display the previous month, or press the lower half to display the next
month.
Note:You can control the dots and lines that display in the Month View.
Refer to Options Menu later in this chapter.
Working in Agenda View
The Agenda view shows your appointments, untimed events, and To Do List items in a
single screen. You can also use the Agenda view to check off completed To Do List items.
To display the Agenda View:
1. Tap the Agenda View button in the Date Book screen.
2. Tap the desired event to go to a Day View of any event on the Agenda view screen.
Agenda View button
Tips for Using Agenda View
•
Tap any appointment while in Agenda view to display the Day View of the
appointment.
•
Check off completed To Do List items in the Agenda view, or click a description of
an item to go directly into the To Do List application.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Date Book
Date Book Menu Commands
The Date Book includes menu commands to perform common file and editing tasks. This
section explains the menu commands that are specific to the Date Book.
Refer to Using Menus on page 3-20 for information about menu commands common to all
of your SPT 1700 terminal applications.
Record Menu
When you select the Record menu, its commands display on screen.
New Event
Creates an event and opens the Set Time screen where you can
choose start and end times for the new event. If you do not enter start
and end times, it creates a blank untimed event.
Delete Event
Opens an alert screen, prompting you to confirm that you want to
delete the current event. You must tap an event before you use the
Delete Event command. Tap the OK button to delete the event from
your SPT 1700 terminal, or tap the Cancel button to close the alert
screen and keep the event.
Note: By default your SPT 1700 terminal removes the event from the
Date Book, but retains a copy of the event and transfers it to an archive
file on your computer the next time you perform a HotSync operation.
To remove the event completely, clear the Save archive copy on PC
check box.
Attach Note
Delete Note
Opens the Note screen, where you can create a Note for the current
event.
Opens an alert screen, prompting you to confirm that you really want
to delete the Note attached to the event. Tap the OK button to delete
the Note from the memory of your SPT 1700 terminal, or tap the
Cancel button to close the alert screen and return to the Date Book.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Purge
Opens an alert screen, prompting you to confirm that you want to
purge events older than a certain time period — based on the current
date on the internal clock on the SPT 1700 terminal. You can use the
Purge command to conserve memory on your SPT 1700 terminal. The
setting removes events from the Date Book, but retains copies and
transfers them to an archive file on your computer during the next
HotSync operation.
Note: The Purge command also deletes repeating events if they end
before the date that you activate the Purge command.
Beam Event
Beams the current event to another terminal through the IR port. Refer
to Beaming Information to Other SPT 1700 Terminals on page 3-30 for
more information.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Date Book
Options Menu
When you select the Options menu, its commands display on screen.
Font
Opens the Select Font screen where you can choose a different font
(text) style for your Date Book entries. Refer to Choosing Fonts on
page 3-23 for details.
Preferences
Enables you to set the range of times that display in the Date Book,
and to automatically activate alarms for each event.
•
•
•
Start/End Time. Enables you to define the start and end
times for the Date Book screens. If the time slots you select
do not fit on one screen, you can tap the arrows to scroll up
and down.
Alarm Preset. Automatically sets an alarm for each new
event. The silent alarm for untimed events is defined by
minutes, days or hours before midnight of the date associated
with the event.
Alarm Sound. Controls the tone the alarm generates when it
sounds (i.e., Alert, Bird, Concert, Phone, etc.)
•
•
Remind Me. Defines how many times the alarm sounds. The
choices are: Once, Twice, 3 times, 5 times and 10 times.
Play Every. Defines how often the alarm sounds. The choices
are every: Minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes and 30 minutes.
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Display Options Allows you to change the Date Book’s appearance and which events
display.
•
•
Show Time Bars. Activates the time bars that display in the
Day View. The time bars show the duration of an event and
illustrate event conflicts.
Compress Day View. Controls how times display in the Day
View. When Compress Day View is off, all time slots display.
When it is on, start and end times display for each event, but
minimize scrolling.
•
View of the Date Book. You can activate any or all of these
settings to show that you have Timed, Untimed or Daily
Repeating events in the Month View only.
Phone Lookup Activates the Phone Lookup feature. Refer to Using Phone Lookup on
page 4-4.
Security
Opens the Change Security screen where you can change the
security of the open memo. Refer to Chapter 15, Applications: Security
for details.
About Date
Book
Shows version (revision) information for the Date Book application.
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Opening Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Using Expense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Creating an Expense Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Changing the Expense Item Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Entering Receipt Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Customizing the Currency Pick List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Show Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Transferring Your Data to Microsoft Excel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Printing an Expense Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Viewing your Expense Report in Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Using Expense Report Templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Expense Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Record Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Expense
Introduction
The Expense application enables you to keep track of your expenses and then transfer the
information to a spreadsheet on your computer.
With the Expense application you can:
•
•
Record dates, type of expenses, amount spent, payment method and other details
associated with any money that you spend.
Create categories for expenses (such as business and personal) associated with
a range of dates.
•
•
•
•
Keep track of vendors (companies) and people involved with particular expenses.
Log miles traveled for a particular date or expense category.
Sort your expenses by date or expense type.
Transfer your expense information to a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet (version 5.0
or later) on your computer. (Microsoft Excel is not included with the SPT 1700
package.)
Opening Expense
To open Expense:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon to open the Applications Launcher.
icon to display the Expense List screen.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Using Expense
Expense enables you to record the date, expense type and the amount that you spent. You
can sort your expense items into categories or add other information that you want to
associate with the item.
Creating an Expense Item
To create an expense item:
1. Tap the New button in the Expense List to create a new item.
Cursor
of new
item
Tap New
Note:You can also create a new expense item by writing on the number
side of the Graffiti pad while in the Expense List screen. The first
number you write begins your new expense item.
2. Enter the amount of the expense.
3. Tap the Expense Type pick list and select a type from the list.
Tap here
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Expense
Note:As soon as you select an expense type, your SPT 1700 terminal
saves your entry. If you do not select an expense type, it does not
save the entry.
Tip: Here’s a quick way to create a new expense item: make sure that no item in
the Expense List has been selected, then write the first letter(s) of the expense
type, followed by the numerical amount of the expense item. This technique takes
advantage of the application’s automatic fill feature. Refer to Options Menu later in
this chapter for details.
Changing the Expense Item Date
Initially, expense items display with the date you enter them on your SPT 1700 terminal.
You can use the Expense application to change the date associated with any expense item.
To change the date of an expense item:
1. Tap the expense item you want to change to highlight the date.
2. Tap the date of the selected item to open the Date screen.
Tap date
3. Tap the date you want for the expense item.
For more information about the Date screen, refer to Scheduling an Event on page 7-4.
Entering Receipt Details
The Expense application provides a variety of options that you can associate with an item.
These options display in the Receipt Details screen.
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
To open the Receipt Details screen:
1. Select the expense item you want to assign details.
2. Tap the Details button to open the Receipt Details screen.
3. Select any of the following options:
Category
Defines the category for the Expense item. Your SPT 1700 terminal
provides two sample categories, New York and Paris, to show how
you might sort your expenses according to different business trips.
When All is selected, the default Category is Unfiled. Otherwise,
the default is the currently selected Category. An expense item
Choose Edit Categories from the pick list to change existing or to
create new expense categories. For example, you might create a
category for a range of dates, such as a week or month, or you
might delete or rename the New York and Paris categories.
Type
Opens a pick list of the expense type options so that you can
change the expense type for any of your expense items. Refer to
expense type automatically.
Payment
Enables you to choose the payment method used to pay the
expense item. If the item is prepaid (such as airline tickets supplied
by your company), you can choose Prepaid to place your expense
in the appropriate company-paid cell of your printed expense
report spreadsheet. Refer to Transferring Your Data to Microsoft
Excel later in this chapter for more information.
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Currency
Enables you to choose the type of currency used to pay the
expense item. The default currency unit is defined in the
Preferences screen (refer to Preferences on page 8-17 later in this
chapter). You can also display up to four other common types of
currency. Refer to Customizing the Currency Pick List on page 8-8
for details.
Vendor and City Enable you to record the name of the vendor (usually a company)
associated with the expense and the city where the expense took
place. For example, a business lunch might be at Rosie's Cafe
(Vendor) in San Francisco (City).
Attendees
Displays Attendees screen which resembles a memo in the Memo
Pad. You can use this screen to list the people who attended the
activity associated with the expense or to make notes, such as the
purpose of the expense.
Note:You can tap the Lookup button to display the names (and the
corresponding companies) of the people in your Address Book. The
Lookup button’s function is similar to the Phone Lookup feature
described in Using Phone Lookup on page 4-4.
4. Tap the OK button to close the Receipt Details screen and activate your selections.
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Customizing the Currency Pick List
You can select the currencies and symbols that display in the Currency pick list.
To customize the Currency pick list:
1. Tap the Currency pick list in the Receipt Details screen, then tap the Edit
Currencies selection to open the Select Currencies screen.
Tap Edit
currencies
display on that line.
3. Tap the OK button to close the Select Currencies screen and activate your
selections.
Note:If the currency you want to use is not in the list of countries, create
your own custom country and currency symbol. Refer to Options
Menu on page 8-17 for details.
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Expense
Show Options
The Show Options define the sort order and other settings that relate to your expense
items.
To open the Show Options screen:
1. Tap the Show button in the Expense List to open the Show Options screen.
Tap Show
2. Select any of the following options:
Sort By
Sorts the Expense entries by date or expense
type.
Distance
Displays Mileage entries in miles or kilometers.
Show Currency Shows or hides the currency symbol in the
expense list.
3. Tap the OK button to close the Show Options screen and activate your selections.
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Transferring Your Data to Microsoft Excel
After you enter your expenses into the Expense application on your SPT 1700 terminal, the
computer.
Note:You need Microsoft Excel version 5.0 (or later) to view and print your
Expense data using one of the provided templates. Microsoft Excel
is not included with the SPT 1700 terminal package. The procedures
in this section assume that you have installed the Symbol Palm
Terminal Desktop software; refer to Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop
Software on page 1-23 for more information.
Printing an Expense Report
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop makes it quick and easy to print your Expense data.
To print your expense report:
1. Perform a HotSync operation to transfer your latest Expense data to your computer
and make it available to Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop. Refer to Chapter 9,
Applications: HotSync® for details.
2. Click the Expense button in Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop to open Microsoft
Excel and the Expense Report configuration screen.
Note:If you launch Expense from the Start menu (instead of Symbol Palm
Terminal Desktop), you must first choose your SPT 1700 terminal
user name.
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Expense
3. Select the expense category that you want to print.
Click to select
Categories
Tip: Press Ctrl+click to select multiple categories. To print the expenses associated
with all of your Expense categories, click the All button in the Categories area.
4. Define an end date for the expense report in the End Date area.
Note:If you do not specify an end date, all expense entries for the selected
categories display — up to the date of the last HotSync operation
with your SPT 1700 terminal.
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
5. Click the Print button to display the expense report in the Print Preview screen.
6. Click the Print button in the Microsoft Excel window to print your expense report.
Viewing your Expense Report in Microsoft Excel
To view your Expense data in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet:
1. Perform a HotSync operation to transfer your latest Expense data to your computer
and make it available to Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop.
2. Click the Expense button in Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop to open Microsoft
Excel and the Expense Report configuration screen.
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Expense
Note:If you start Expense from the Start menu (instead of Symbol Palm
Terminal Desktop), first choose your SPT 1700 terminal user name.
Click to select
Categories
3. Click the expense category that you want to use.
Tip: You can press Shift+click to select multiple categories. If you want to view the
expenses associated with all of your Expense categories, click the All button in the
Categories area.
4. If you want to define an end date for the expense report, enter the date in the End
Date area.
Note:If you do not specify an end date, all expense entries for the selected
categories will display — up to the date of the last HotSync
operation.
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
5. Click the Create button to display a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet containing your
Expense data.
At this point, your Expense data displays in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet form. You can
enter information, make formatting changes and save and print the file in the normal
manner.
Using Expense Report Templates
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software comes with several expense report templates.
When you use one of these templates, you can edit your Expense data in Microsoft Excel.
templates. For example, you can add your company name to a template. Refer to Appendix
A, Using Expense Templates and Custom Expense Reports for sample templates and for
details on changing templates.
To view your Expense data using a Microsoft Excel template:
1. Display your Expense data in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet as described in
Viewing your Expense Report in Microsoft Excel.
2. Click the Options button to open the Expense Report Options screen.
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Expense
Enter name and
other information
Choose expense
template
report.
4. Click the Templates menu, then click an expense template. Refer to Appendix A,
Using Expense Templates and Custom Expense Reports for samples.
Note:If you want to create your own custom expense template and have
it display in the Templates menu, refer to Appendix A, Using
Expense Templates and Custom Expense Reports.
5. Click the OK button to return to the Expense Report Options screen.
Expense Menu Commands
The Expense application includes menu commands to perform common file and editing
tasks. This section explains the menu commands that are specific to the Expense
application.
Refer to Using Menus on page 3-20 for information about menu commands that are
common to all of your SPT 1700 terminal applications.
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Record Menu
When you select the Record menu, its commands display on screen.
Delete Item
Opens an alert screen, prompting you to
confirm that you want to delete the current
expense item. You must tap an item before you
can use the Delete Item command. Tap the OK
button to delete the item from your SPT 1700
terminal, or tap the Cancel button to close the
alert screen and keep the item.
Note: By default your SPT 1700 terminal
removes the item from the Expense application,
but retains a copy of the item and transfers it to
an archive file on your computer the next time
you perform a HotSync operation. To remove
the item completely, clear the Save archive
copy on PC check box.
Purge
Conserves memory on your SPT 1700 terminal
by deleting expense categories that you no
longer use.
The Purge command prompts you to confirm
that you want to purge all the records from the
selected category.
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Expense
Options Menu
When you select the Options menu, its commands display on screen.
Preferences
Activates the Preferences screen, which is used to
activate the automatic fill feature and to set the
default currency symbol.
•
Use automatic fill. Enables you to select
an expense type by writing the first letter
of an expense type in the Graffiti writing
area. For example, if you write the letter
“T,” it enters the “Taxi” expense type.
Writing “T” and then “E” enters
“Telephone” which is the first expense
type beginning with the letters “TE.”
•
Default currency. Sets the default
currency symbol for the Expense
application.
Custom
Currencies
Enables you to define additional currency symbols
for the Expense application.
Note: Use this command only if the currency
symbol you need is not available in the Currency
pick list of the Receipt Details screen (refer to
“Entering Receipt Details” earlier in this chapter).
About Expense Shows version (revision) information for the
Expense application.
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
To define a custom currency symbol:
1. Choose Custom Currencies from the Options menu to open the Custom
Currencies screen.
Tap a Country
button
2. Tap one of the four Country boxes to open the Currency Properties screen.
3. Enter the name of the country and the symbol that you want to display in the
Expense application, then tap the OK button to define your setting.
4. Tap the OK button to close the Custom Currencies screen.
Note:If you want to use your custom currency symbol as the default for all
Expense entries, choose the symbol in the Preferences screen. To
use your custom currency symbol only for particular expense items,
choose the symbol in the Receipt Details screen associated with
those items.
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
®
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
The HotSync Process and the HotSync Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Performing a HotSync Operation for the First Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Using User Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Using File Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Conducting a Local HotSync Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Selecting HotSync Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Customizing HotSync Application Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Conducting a HotSync Operation via Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Preparing Your Computer for a Modem HotSync Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Preparing Your SPT 1700 Terminal for a Modem HotSync Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Selecting the Conduits for a Modem HotSync Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Performing a HotSync Operation via Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Conducting Wireless HotSync Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Setting Up for a Wireless HotSync. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Performing a Spectrum24 HotSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Performing a CDPD HotSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Performing a GSM HotSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Setting Up the Ethernet Cradle for HotSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Installing NetSync. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Creating a CRD1700-4000E Modem Sync Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Configuring the Remote Host PC for Use with the Ethernet Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: HotSync®
Introduction
HotSync technology enables you to synchronize (exchange and update) data between one
or more SPT 1700 terminals and the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software. To
synchronize data, you must connect your SPT 1700 terminal and Symbol Palm Terminal
Desktop either directly with a cable or cradle, or indirectly with a modem or network.
With HotSync technology you can:
•
Synchronize the data entries on your SPT 1700 terminal with the entries on your
host system, and vice versa.
•
•
Manage individual or multiple SPT 1700 terminals with a centralized computer.
Keep your data safe by automatically creating backup copies each time you
synchronize.
The HotSync Process and the HotSync Manager
The HotSync process automatically synchronizes data between your SPT 1700 terminal
and Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop. Changes you make on your SPT 1700 terminal or
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop display in both places after a HotSync operation. HotSync
technology synchronizes only the needed portions of files, thus reducing synchronization
time. You can synchronize your data by connecting your SPT 1700 terminal directly to your
computer with either the single- or four-slot serial cradle or Synchronization/Charging
Cable, or indirectly with a modem or network.
The HotSync Manager oversees the synchronization process. It runs in the background
and monitors a communications port on your computer for a HotSync command from an
SPT 1700 terminal. When it “hears” a HotSync command, HotSync Manager synchronizes
data in the Date Book, Address Book, To Do List, Memo Pad, Mail and Expense
applications, even when the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop is not running!
Once you complete a few simple setup steps, performing a HotSync operation is as simple
as pressing a button. Follow the steps in the next section to complete the setup.
Performing a HotSync Operation for the First Time
The first time you synchronize your data, you need to enter user information on both the
SPT 1700 terminal and the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop. Once you enter this information
and synchronize, the HotSync Manager recognizes your SPT 1700 terminal and doesn’t
ask for this information again. If you are a System Administrator preparing several SPT
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
1700 terminals for a group of users, refer to Conducting Wireless HotSync Operations on
page 9-18 performing the following steps.
Important: You must perform your first HotSync operation with a local, direct connection,
rather than using a modem.
Note:The following instructions assume that you have already installed
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software on your computer. If you
have not yet installed the software, refer to Symbol Palm Terminal
Desktop Software on page 1-23 for details.
To perform a HotSync operation for the first time:
1. Double-click the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop icon on the Windows desktop (or
select Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop from the Start menu) to start the Symbol
Palm Terminal Desktop software.
2. Click the
menu.
icon in the Windows System Tray to open the HotSync Manager
Tip: The Windows System Tray is usually in the lower-right corner on your
computer display. The location may vary depending on the location of the taskbar
and the version of Windows you are using.
3. Click Local from the HotSync Manager menu to indicate that you are using the
cradle or the synchronization/charging cable to synchronize.
4. Turn on the SPT 1700 terminal and slide it into the cradle.
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: HotSync®
Note:If you are using the synchronization/charging cable, connect one
end of the cable into the serial port on the back of your computer,
and the other end into the serial port on the bottom of the terminal.
Tip: The curved edge on the bottom of the SPT 1700 terminal should align
smoothly with the cradle when it is inserted properly.
5. Press the
dialog.
button on the front of the SPT 1700 cradle and open the New User
Note:If you are using the synchronization/charging cable, tap the
icon
on the terminal.
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
HotSync
button
6. Enter a user name for your SPT 1700 terminal and click the OK button to open the
HotSync Progress dialog and start the synchronization process.
Important: Every SPT 1700 terminal should have a unique name. Never try to
synchronize more than one SPT 1700 terminal to the same user name.
7. Wait for the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop to display a message indicating that
the process is complete.
Using User Profiles
If you need to configure a number of SPT 1700 terminals with specific information (such as
a company phone list) before distributing them to their users, you can create a User Profile
to load the data into a SPT 1700 terminal without associating that data with a user name.
The User Profile feature is designed only for the first-time HotSync operation, before you
assign a User ID to a particular SPT 1700 terminal. Refer to Conducting Wireless HotSync
Operations on page 9-18 for information about loading data after you assign a User ID.
9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: HotSync®
To create a User Profile:
1. Open the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software.
2. Click Users from the Tools menu to open the Users dialog.
3. Click the Profiles button to open the Profiles dialog.
4. Click the New button to open the New Profile dialog.
5. Enter a unique name for the Profile and click the OK button to return to the Profiles
dialog.
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Profile that you want to create, then click the OK
button to return to the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop.
7. Select the Profile from the User drop-down box in the upper right hand corner of
the screen and create the data for the Profile (e.g., company phone list, etc.).
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
To use a Profile for the first-time HotSync operation:
1. Place the new SPT 1700 terminal in the cradle, and press the
cradle to open the Users dialog.
button on the
2. Click the Profiles button to open the Profiles dialog.
3. Choose the Profile that you want to load on the SPT 1700 terminal, and click the
OK button to open the following alert dialog:
4. Click the Yes button to transfer all the Profile data to the SPT 1700 terminal.
The next time you perform a HotSync operation, the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop
prompts you to assign a User name to the SPT 1700 terminal.
Using File Link
The File Link feature enables you to synchronize the Address Book and Memo Pad
information on your SPT 1700 terminal with a separate external file such as a company
phone list. HotSync Manager stores the data in a separate category on your Symbol Palm
Terminal Desktop and your SPT 1700 terminal. You can configure the File Link feature to
check for changes to the external file when you perform a HotSync operation.
With File Link you can synchronize with data stored in any of the following formats:
•
•
•
•
•
Comma delimited (*.csv)
Tab delimited (*.tsv)
Memo Pad archive (*.mpa)
Address Book archive (*.aba)
Text (*.txt)
For information on how to set up a File Link, refer to the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop
Software online Help.
9-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: HotSync®
Conducting a Local HotSync Operation
After you complete the first HotSync operation, the HotSync process is even faster and
easier!
To conduct a local HotSync operation:
1. Insert the SPT 1700 terminal in the cradle, or connect the synchronization/charging
cable.
2. Start the HotSync Manager.
3. Press the
HotSync process. If you are using the synchronization/charging cable or the CRD
1700-4000S cradle, tap the icon on the terminal’s application screen.
button on the front of the CRD1700-1000S cradle to start the
Synchronization begins immediately.
4. Wait for the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop to display a message indicating that
the process is complete.
Selecting HotSync Setup Options
You can choose when you want HotSync Manager to run, and adjust the local, modem, and
network HotSync settings.
To set the HotSync Options:
1. Click the
icon in the Windows System Tray to open the HotSync Manager menu
and click Setup. The Setup dialog displays with the General tab open:
.
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
2. Select one of the following options:
Always available Adds HotSync Manager to the Startup folder and constantly
monitors the communication port for SPT 1700 terminal
synchronization requests. With this option, the HotSync
Manager conducts synchronizations even when the Symbol
Palm Terminal Desktop is not running.
Available only
Starts HotSync Manager and monitors requests automatically
when the Symbol when you open the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software.
Palm Terminal
Desktop is
running
Manual
Starts the HotSync Manager and monitors requests only when
you select HotSync Manager from the Start menu.
Tip: If you’re not sure which option to use, use the Always available default setting.
3. Click the Local tab to display the settings for the connection between your
computer and the SPT 1700 cradle or synchronization cable, and adjust the
options as needed.
Serial Port
Identifies the port Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop will use to
communicate with the cradle or the synchronization/charging
cable. This selection should match the port number where you
connected the cradle or synchronization/charging cable.
Note: Your SPT 1700 terminal cannot share this port with an
internal modem or other device. If you have trouble determining the
correct serial port, refer to Troubleshooting on page 20-9.
9-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: HotSync®
Speed
Determines the speed at which data is transferred between your
SPT 1700 terminal and Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop. We
suggest you try the As Fast As Possible rate first, and adjust
downward if you experience problems. This setting allows the
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop and SPT 1700 terminal to find and
use the fastest speed.
4. Click the Modem tab to display the Modem settings and adjust the options as
needed.
Serial Port
Speed
Identifies the port where the modem is located. If you are unsure of
the port assignment, review the Modem Properties in the Windows
Control Panel.
Determines the speed at which data is transferred. We suggest you
try the As Fast As Possible rate first, and adjust downward if you
experience problems. This setting allows the Symbol Palm
Terminal Desktop and SPT 1700 terminal to find and use the
fastest speed.
Modem
Identifies the modem type or manufacturer. Refer to your modem
manual or face plate for its type or settings. If you’re not sure of
your modem type or your modem doesn’t match any that appear in
the list, choose Hayes Basic.
Setup String
Identifies the setup string for your particular modem. Not all
modems require a setup string. Refer to your modem manual and
enter the setup string if recommended by the manufacturer.
5. Click the Network tab to display Network settings and adjust the options as needed.
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Note:You must have Network HotSync software installed to use this
feature. Refer to Configuring NetSync Options on page 9-22.
6. Click TCP/IP Settings to obtain the Primary PC Name, Address, and Subnet Mask
(optional) for the selected user.
7. Click OK to close the Setup dialog.
Customizing HotSync Application Settings
For each application you can define a set of options that determines how records are
handled during synchronization. These options are called a “conduit.” By default, the
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop synchronizes all files between the SPT 1700 terminal and
the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop. In general, you should leave the settings to
synchronize all files. The only reason you might want to change these settings is to
overwrite data on either your SPT 1700 terminal or Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop, or to
avoid synchronizing a particular type of file because you don’t use it.
In addition to the standard application conduits, the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop
includes System and Install conduits. The System conduit backs up the system information
stored in your SPT 1700 terminal, including Graffiti software ShortCuts. The Install conduit
is used to install Palm-compatible applications.
To customize HotSync application settings:
1. Click the
menu.
icon in the Windows System Tray to open the HotSync Manager
9-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: HotSync®
Tip: You can also click the HotSync command on the Symbol Palm Terminal
Desktop menu bar to open the HotSync Manager menu.
2. Click Custom from the HotSync menu to open the Custom dialog.
3. Select the appropriate user name from the drop-down list.
4. Select an application in the Conduit list to choose the conduit you want to change.
5. Click the Change button to open the Change HotSync Action dialog.
Check here to
make new settings
the default
Click to skip data
transfer for an
application
6. Determine the action you want to take.
Note:Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next
HotSync operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their
default settings. To use a new setting on an ongoing basis, check the
Set As Default box. Clicking the Default button in the Custom dialog
will revert to the new default settings.
9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to change conduit settings for other applications or for a
different user name.
8. Click the OK button to close the Change HotSync Action dialog and activate your
settings.
Conducting a HotSync Operation via Modem
You can use a modem to synchronize your SPT 1700 terminal when you are away from
your computer.
Note:You must first conduct an initial local HotSync operation using any
of the SPT 1700 cradles before you perform a modem HotSync
operation. Refer to Conducting a Local HotSync Operation on page
9-9 for details.
To perform a HotSync operation via modem you need:
•
•
A modem connected to your computer.
A modem connected to your SPT 1700 terminal with a special modem cable. (The
cradle is not used for a modem HotSync operation.)
•
The Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software configured for use with a modem as
described in Selecting HotSync Setup Options on page 9-9.
Preparing Your Computer for a Modem HotSync Operation
There are several steps you must perform to prepare your computer for a modem HotSync
operation. Be sure to perform these steps before you leave your office so that your
computer is ready to receive a call from your SPT 1700 terminal.
9-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: HotSync®
To prepare your computer for a modem HotSync operation:
1. Confirm that the computer modem is connected and turned on, and that no
communications applications, such as fax or telephony software, are running on a
COM port.
Note:Make sure the computer is disconnected from all online services,
such as America Online (AOL) and CompuServe. This helps to
avoid conflicts with the COM port.
2. Start HotSync Manager and select Modem from the HotSync Manager menu.
Refer to Selecting HotSync Setup Options on page 9-9 for details about this
screen.
Preparing Your SPT 1700 Terminal for a Modem HotSync
Operation
To prepare your SPT 1700 terminal for a modem HotSync operation:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon to open the Applications Launcher.
icon to open the HotSync screen.
3. Tap Modem and select your modem from the pick list.
Note:This will vary, dependent upon the SPT terminal you are using: SPT
1733 terminals use Merlin, SPT 1734 terminals use GSM modem,
and SPT 174x terminals use Spectrum24.
4. Tap Enter Phone # to open the Phone Setup screen.
9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Note:If you have Network HotSync software installed on your SPT 1700
terminal, the Remote Setup screen displays instead. Refer to
Network Preferences and Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop TCP/IP
Software on page 14-13 for more information.
5. Enter the telephone number to access the modem connected to your computer.
6. If needed, enter a dial prefix (such as “9”) to access an outside line, and then tap
the Dial Prefix check box.
Tip: You can enter a comma in the field to introduce a “pause” in the dialing
sequence.
7. If the phone line you’re using for the SPT 1700 terminal has “Call Waiting,” select
the Disable call waiting check box to avoid an interruption during the modem
HotSync operation.
8. If you want to use a calling card to place the call, select the check box and enter
the calling card number.
9. Tap OK to return to the HotSync screen.
10. Tap the
icon to open the HotSync menus.
11. Tap Modem Sync Preferences from the Options menu to display the Modem Sync
Preferences screen.
12. Select Direct to Modem.
13. Click OK.
Selecting the Conduits for a Modem HotSync Operation
The Conduit Setup screen on your SPT 1700 terminal enables you to define which files
and/or applications synchronize during a modem HotSync operation. Use these settings to
minimize the time required to synchronize data with a modem.
To change the Conduit Setup for a modem HotSync operation:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon to display the HotSync screen.
icon to open the HotSync menus.
3. Tap Conduit Setup from the Options menu to open the Conduit Setup screen.
9-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: HotSync®
4. Tap the check boxes to de-select the files and/or applications that you do not want
to synchronize during a modem HotSync operation. The default setting is to
synchronize all files.
Note:Applications that do not have a database (such as games) do not
synchronize — even if the item is selected in the Conduit Setup
screen.
5. Tap the OK button to close the Conduit Setup screen and activate your settings for
the next modem HotSync operation.
Performing a HotSync Operation via Modem
To perform a Modem HotSync operation:
Note:If you are not using a PalmPilot modem, you need a special modem
cable and an external modem. Connect one end of the special
modem cable to the serial connector on the SPT 1700 terminal and
the other end to the external modem. Do not attempt to use other
kinds of cables, even if they appear to be similar.
1. Tap the
icon to open the HotSync application.
icon to dial the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop modem and
2. Tap the large
synchronize the applications selected under Conduit Setup.
3. Wait for the HotSync operation to complete.
If you have any problems conducting a HotSync operation, refer to Troubleshooting
on page 20-9.
9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Conducting Wireless HotSync Operations
Using HotSync you can take advantage of the LAN and WAN connectivity available in
business environments. You can dial in to a network or use a cradle that is connected to
any computer on your LAN or WAN (provided that the computer connected to the cradle
also has HotSync installed, your computer is on, and the HotSync Manager is running).
Setting Up for a Wireless HotSync
The SPT 1733, 1734, and 174x terminals allow you to perform a HotSync without using a
cradle over a terminal specific wireless LAN (174x) or WAN (173x). This section describes
the setup necessary for a wireless HotSync to occur.
Before a wireless HotSync can be performed, each terminal must be properly configured
for use. Refer to Chapter 2, Network Setup for specific instructions for each terminal.
Once the terminal is properly configured for use, it must be set up to perform a wireless
HotSync over the LAN or WAN.
To properly configure your terminal:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon to open the Applications Launcher.
icon to open the HotSync application.
3. Tap the
Prefs.
icon to display the HotSync Options menu and select Modem Sync
Select Network and tap OK.
4. Tap LANSync Prefs from the Options menu and select Local HotSync.
5. Tap Primary PC Setup on the Options menu.
Note:The Primary PC Setup is extremely important! It tells the terminal
how to locate the machine which it will synchronize with on the
network.
9-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: HotSync®
The Primary PC Setup screen displays:
The information required for this screen is located by selecting the TCP/IP button
on the Network tab of the HotSync Manager on the machine you are hotsyncing to.
Copy down the Primary PC Name, Primary PC address, and the Subnet mask, and
enter that information manually on the above screen. Refer to Selecting HotSync
Setup Options on page 9-9 for details on how to access the Network tab.
Note:If the Subnet Mask box on your PC is empty, you do not need to
enter anything in that section on your terminal.
6. Tap OK.
7. Tap Connection Setup on the Option menu and select:
a. Spectrum24 for a SPT 174x terminal
b. Merlin for a SPT 1733 (CDPD) terminal — or —
c. GSM Modem for a SPT 1734 terminal
Performing a Spectrum24 HotSync
Note:This function is available on SPT 174x terminals only.
To perform a HotSync via the Spectrum24 wireless LAN:
1. Ensure the terminal has been properly configured for use. Refer to Setting Up for
a Wireless HotSync on page 9-18 for details.
2. Select the HotSync application from the main application screen.
3. Tap Modem, and tap Select Service to display the Network Preference Screen.
9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Verify that Spectrum24 displays in the Service pick list and that phone setup
information is accurate and tap Done.
4. Tap the HotSync button to initiate the HotSync.
Performing a CDPD HotSync
Note:This function is available on SPT 1733 terminals only.
To perform a HotSync via the CDPD wireless WAN:
1. Ensure the terminal has been properly configured for use. Refer to Setting Up for
a Wireless HotSync on page 9-18 for details.
2. Tap the
icon to open the HotSync application.
3. Tap Modem, and tap Select Service to display the Network Preference screen.
4. Verify that Merlin displays in the Service pick list and that phone setup information
is accurate and tap Done.
5. Tap the HotSync button to initiate the HotSync.
9-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: HotSync®
Performing a GSM HotSync
Note:This function is available on SPT 1734 terminals only.
Before performing a GSM HotSync, you must first set up the modem registration
information. To do so:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon to open the Applications Launcher.
icon to open the GSM Demo application. The main screen displays:
3. Select the Leave modem registered checkbox.
Note:This option can only be set if the modem has been registered.
4. Exit GSM Demo.
Ensure the terminal has been properly configured for use. Refer to Setting Up for a
Wireless HotSync on page 9-18 for details.
5. Tap the
6. Tap the
icon to open the Applications Launcher.
icon to open the HotSync application.
7. Tap Modem, and tap Select Service to display the Network Preference Screen.
8. Verify that the GSM modem displays in the Service pick list and that phone setup
information is accurate and tap Done.
9. Tap the HotSync button to initiate the HotSync.
When the HotSync is complete and if a registered modem is no longer needed,
open GsmDemo and de-register the modem (Refer to Using GsmDemo on page
18-3 for details). This action will save battery life.
9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Setting Up the Ethernet Cradle for HotSync
The CRD1700-4000E appears to SPT 1700 terminals inserted into the cradle as a dial-up
PPP service. Therefore, just as you would set up a Palm III terminal to connect to an
Internet Service Provider (ISP) like Compuserve or Earthlink, the SPT 1700 terminals must
be configured for use with the cradle. This section describes the steps necessary to
configure both the SPT 1700 terminal and the CRD1700-4000E.
Installing NetSync
An SPT 1700 terminal must have NetSync installed and configured for it to communicate
with the CRD1700-4000E. Additionally, NetSync extensions to the HotSync Manager must
be installed on the host system which the SPT 1700 terminal is to synchronize with. The
Network HotSync software is a free add-on for SPT 1700 terminals and is available at http:/
/www.palm.com/custsupp/downloads/netsync.html.
Follow the instructions to install the network HotSync software on your host PC, then
perform a HotSync to install the program on your SPT 1700 terminal.
Configuring NetSync Options
Once NetSync is installed on your SPT 1700 terminal, it must be configured for use with the
CRD1700-4000E. From the HotSync panel on your SPT 1700, select each of the option
panels available from the “Options” menu (accessed by tapping the Menu icon) and
configure them as follows:
1. To configure Modem Sync Preferences:
2. Tap the
icon to open the HotSync menus.
3. Tap Modem Sync Preferences from the Options menu to display the Modem Sync
Preferences screen.
4. Select Network.
5. Tap OK.
6. To configure the Local Sync Preferences:
a. Tap the
icon to open the HotSync menus.
b. Tap LANSync Preferences from the Options menu to display the LANSync
Preferences screen.
c. Select Local HotSync(the CRD1700-4000E doesn’t use LANSync
functionality).
d. Tap OK.
9-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: HotSync®
7. To configure the Primary PC Setup, refer to the Setting Up for a Wireless HotSync
on page 9-18 for details:
Note:Primary PC Setup is extremely important! It tells the terminal how to
locate the machine which it will synchronize with on the network.
8. Tap the
icon to open the HotSync menus and select Conduit Setup.
a. Check any items that you want synchronized and uncheck any items that you
don’t want synchronized.
b. Tap OK.
9. Tap the
icon to open the HotSync menus and select Connection Setup.
a. For optimal performance, choose a communication rate of 57600 bps and a
Standard modem.
b. Tap Done.
Creating a CRD1700-4000E Modem Sync Service
The SPT 1700 terminal communicates with the CRD1700-4000E via a Modem Sync. The
Modem Sync offers many options which must be configured for use with the CRD1700-
4000E.
Create a separate CRD1700-4000E network configuration and select it as your default
Modem Sync service. Use either Graffiti or the keyboard feature (click in the lower left-hand
corner of the scratch pad on the abc to access the keyboard) to enter the following
information:
1. Tap the
icon to open the HotSync application.
2. Choose the Select Service box under the Modem Sync icon to create a new
CRD1700-4000E service.
3. To select the Earthlink service, Click Menu, Duplicate.
4. Change the service name to CRD1700-4000E. Leave the user name and
password blank. You may enter any phone number you want, except ‘00’, or you
may leave it blank. The SPT 1700 terminal will not be able to HotSync if you use
‘00’ as a phone number.
9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Configuring the Remote Host PC for Use with the Ethernet
Cradle
The remote PC you wish to HotSync the SPT 1700 to must be set up for Network HotSync
and configured to run from the network.
1. Make sure HotSync Manager is installed and running.
2. From the HotSync Manager, make sure Network is checked. If you don’t want
HotSync Manager to use a serial port, make sure Local is unchecked.
Note:The PC must be configured for proper TCP/IP network operation.
The Ethernet HotSync Process
Once the CRD1700-4000E is properly connected, data communication between an SPT
1700 terminal and the host computer can take place. When a terminal is inserted in the
cradle, the cradle detects its presence and attempts to initiate the HotSync process on the
terminal. All local slots in the cradle operate simultaneously; the HotSync procedure starts
immediately when any terminal is inserted into a local slot.
As stated earlier, if multiple slots are to be HotSync’d simultaneously, each must
communicate with a different host PC. If the application requires simultaneous connection
to a single host database, additional software, available from Symbol, is required.
Terminals inserted into daisy-chained cradles are HotSync’d in a round-robin fashion
simultaneously with any HotSyncs from local slots. Daisy-chained cradles share a logical
“fifth slot” on the CRD1700-4000E, which, while it shares equal priority with the local slots,
allows only one HotSync at a time.
Performing HotSync with the Ethernet Cradle
To initiate communication between the terminal and the host, gently insert the SPT 1700
terminal into a local cradle slot, or a slot on an inter-connected serial cradle. Do not force.
When properly inserted, the slot’s LED turns red, then changes to flashing green, indicating
that the host and the terminal are communicating. Removing the terminal from the cradle
while the LED is flashing green will result in a disruption of communication data may be lost.
If the terminal is inserted into an inter-connected serial cradle slot while another terminal on
the serial cradle chain is communicating with a host, the terminal waits (its LED remains
red) until the first terminal finishes communicating. After the communication session
completes, the slot’s LED turns solid green and remains green until the terminal is removed
from the slot. To remove the terminal, pull it straight up from the slot.
9-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Overview of the ScoutSync Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Configuring the ScoutSync Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Selecting Conduits for Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Performing a Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Automatically Synchronizing Using a Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Viewing the Synchronization Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
ScoutSync Client Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: ScoutSync Client
Introduction
This chapter explains how to configure and use the ScoutSync Client on an SPT 1700
terminal. By reading this chapter, you will learn how to perform a synchronization and view
your ScoutSync Client synchronization log.
Note:Before performing the procedures found in this chapter, your system
administrator should install, set up, and run ScoutSync on a
computer. Your system administrator must also grant you access to
a Scout Server.
Overview of the ScoutSync Client
The ScoutSync Client is an application that enables you to connect your SPT 1700 terminal
to a Scout Server. A Scout Server resides on a Windows NT server or workstation that your
system administrator manages and is responsible for transferring data between the
ScoutSync Client and your company’s back-end applications and databases. Using Scout’s
powerful technology, you can seamlessly transfer data using an SPT 1700 terminal from
virtually anywhere to your company’s data stores.
Using the ScoutSync Client on your SPT 1700 terminal, you can:
•
Run ScoutSync Conduits
A ScoutSync Conduit is the central processing component that implements the
synchronization logic during a synchronization session. Your system administrator
installs conduits on your device.
•
•
Initiate a synchronization session
View your SPT 1700 terminal’s synchronization log.
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Configuring the ScoutSync Client
The Scout Preferences settings enable you to connect a mobile device to a ScoutSync
Server. When configuring the preferences, you must specify the Scout host/server name,
the command port used for ScoutSync Client/Server communications, and the user's
profile/ID.
Note:You must configure the settings before performing a
synchronization.
To configure the ScoutSync Client preferences of an SPT 1700 terminal:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon to open the Applications Launcher.
icon to open ScoutSync. The main ScoutSync screen displays:
3. Tap the Preferences button. The following screen displays:
4. Enter the Scout Server Name and the Port Number. The default connection port is
8025 and should not be changed unless instructed by your system administrator.
5. Enter the Profile.
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: ScoutSync Client
6. Tap the word “Unassigned” in the Password field to display the Password box. If
applicable, enter a password and tap the OK button. If not, tap Cancel.
Note:“Assigned” replaces “Unassigned” after you enter a password.
7. Tap the More button. The Advanced Preferences screen displays:
•
•
To synchronize on application launch, tap the Start sync on app launch check
box.
To close the network connection after a synchronization, tap the Close
connection after sync check box.
•
•
To be notified about errors, tap the Notify about errors during sync check box.
To indicate that you are using a Novatel Minstrel modem, tap the Check modem
status before sync check box.
8. Tap OK twice to close the Scout Preferences screen.
Selecting Conduits for Synchronization
Developers have the ability can create custom conduits for synchronizing data. Before
performing a synchronization, you can specify the conduits you want activated. Each
conduit is associated with an application and determines how data is handled during a
synchronization session. When a conduit is selected for synchronization, it knows what
actions to perform and how to process the files and databases.
To select conduits for synchronizing an SPT 1700 terminal:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon to open ScoutSync. The main ScoutSync screen displays.
icon to open the Conduit List.
3. Tap the checkboxes of the conduits that you want to synchronize.
4. Tap Done.
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Performing a Synchronization
To perform a synchronization:
1. Tap the
icon from the Applications Launcher. The following screen displays:
2. Tap the
icon.
The synchronization process begins.
Automatically Synchronizing Using a Cradle
You can configure a mobile device to automatically start and connect to a server when
placed in the cradle. Once the device is configured, when placed in a cradle it will
automatically perform a synchronization until you disable the feature.
To automatically synchronize using a cradle with an SPT 1700 terminal:
1. Open the Applications Launcher.
2. Tap the
icon.
3. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner and select Buttons. The following screen
displays:
10-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: ScoutSync Client
4. Tap the HotSync button to open HotSync. The following screen displays:
5. Select ScoutSync from the Cradle pick list.
6. Return to the Applications Launcher and tap the
screen is displayed.
icon. The main ScoutSync
7. Tap Preferences, then More. The Advanced Preferences screen displays:
8. Select the Start sync on app launch check box and tap OK.
9. Place the SPT 1700 terminal in the cradle.
Viewing the Synchronization Log
The synchronization log of a mobile device displays a record of the date and time a user
logged on and off a server. It also displays the list of files and databases installed on the
mobile device and other informational messages.
To view the Synchronization Log:
1. Tap the
icon. The main ScoutSync screen is displayed.
2. Tap the View Log button.
The ScoutSync Log is displayed.
Note:Only the most recent synchronization session log displays.
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
ScoutSync Client Menu Commands
ScoutSync Client includes menu commands to make it fast and easy to perform common
tasks. This section explains the menu commands specific to ScoutSync.
Refer to Using Menus on page 3-20 for information about menu commands common to
most of your SPT 1700 terminal applications.
Options Menu
When you select the Options menu, its commands display on the screen.
Conduit List
ScoutSync
Preferences
Allows you to choose which conduits run during ScoutSync.
Automatically attempt a ScoutSync connection.
Opens the Scout Preferences screen, where you can enter the Scout
Server name, port number, profile, and password.
Network
Settings
Opens the Preferences screen, where you set up your service and
connection preferences.
About
Provides version information.
10-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
AvantGo Client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Navigating in AvantGo Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Icon Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Using the Channel Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Updating Channel Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Using the Forms Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Editing Forms in the Forms Manager Cue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Deleting Forms in the Forms Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Using HTML Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Using AvantGo Client With a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Browsing Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Synchronizing With a Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
AvantGo Client Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Channels Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Go Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Mobile Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Servers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Edit Server Profile Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Advanced Connection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Using the Mobile Link Application on Your SPT 173x Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Mobile Link Menu Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
11-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: AvantGo Client and Mobile Link
Introduction
The AvantGo Client is used to view channels, which are sets of related Web pages. Mobile
Link helps the SPT 173x terminal communicate with Web-based information on a network
when it is synchronized. Your system administrator defines and provides most channels for
you, although you may define your own personal channels as well.
Note:AvantGo Client and Mobile Link are available on SPT 173x terminals
only.
AvantGo Client
To open AvantGo Client:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon to open the Applications Launcher.
icon. The main screen displays:
Navigating in AvantGo Client
Like other Web browsers, AvantGo Client navigation tools allow you to go back, forward,
Open a Page, Reload a Page, and go Home.
11-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Icon Descriptions
Open Page Icon
Enables online browsing. Tap to navigate to a URL you want to view.
Reload Page Icon
Tap to clear form data, reload the contents of your subscribed
channels, or reload a specific page in a channel.
Backward and
Forward
Tap for backward and forward navigation.
Home
Tap to navigate to your home page.
Using the Channel Manager
The Channel Manager is used to view a channel's size or clear its contents.
To open the Channel Manager:
1. Tap the
icon to open the AvantGo Client menus and select Channels, Channel
Manager. The following screen displays:
A list of channels to which you are subscribed are displayed, including each
channel's size.
2. Tap a channel's title to view its pages.
11-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: AvantGo Client and Mobile Link
3. Mark the check box next to the channel you want to clear.
4. Tap the Select All button to clear all channels.
5. Tap the Clear button to remove selected channels from the device.
The channel size for each changes to 0K. The channel contents will be restored
the next time you synchronize your data.
Note:If you wish to unsubscribe from a group channel, please contact your
administrator.
Updating Channel Pages
To update your channel's pages, all you need to do is sync your device:
1. Place the SPT 173x terminal in its cradle.
Make certain the cradle is connected by its serial cable to your desktop.
2. Open Hotsync on your desktop via the Windows system tray.
3. Click the
icon on the SPT 173x terminal (or on the device cradle) to activate
HotSync. The HotSync in Progress screen displays:
HotSync automatically connects your device to the AvantGo Server and updates
your channels.
11-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Using the Forms Manager
To view the Forms Manager:
1. Tap the
icon to open the AvantGo Client menus. Select Forms Manager from
the Channel menu.
AvantGo Client displays a list of forms that you've submitted or are going to submit
during the next sync.
2. If the form was submitted successfully, the word success displays to the right of the
form's name.
3. Tap the Success button to view the form.
AvantGo Client displays the result page sent by the channel the next time you
synchronize your data.
Editing Forms in the Forms Manager Cue
1. Tap the
icon to open the AvantGo Client menus. Select the Forms Manager
from the Channel menu.The Forms Manager displays.
2. In the third column, tap the linked title of the form. The form displays.
3. Edit the form then tap the Submit button.
AvantGo Client displays a message indicating the form will be submitted on the
next synchronization.
4. Tap OK.
11-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: AvantGo Client and Mobile Link
Deleting Forms in the Forms Manager
1. Tap the
icon to open the AvantGo Client menus. Select Forms Manager from
the Channel menu. The Forms Manager displays.
2. Tap Delete All or tap the checkbox to the left of the form(s) listed in the Forms
Manager that you want to delete.
3. Tap Delete.
4. Tap OK to confirm the deletion.
Using HTML Forms
You can use AvantGo Client to fill out and submit HTML forms, just like you do in Web
browsers on a desktop.
AvantGo Client handles forms differently in online and offline modes. When you are in
online mode, tap the Submit button and AvantGo sends the request to the Web site which
sends back a response, and displays the results on your SPT 173x terminal.
When in offline mode, AvantGo Client can't send the request to the Web site until you sync
your device with your desktop computer. Therefore, you are not able to view the current
stock prices until after the form is submitted and the results returned through the
synchronization process. In this case, the form submittal is saved on the SPT 173x in the
Forms Manager until you sync. At that time, it is submitted to the Web site, which sends
back a response. Depending on the page, this response can be viewed in the channel
where it was submitted or in the Forms Manager.
Submitting the Form
To submit HTML forms in AvantGo Client:
1. Fill out the form and tap the Submit button.
AvantGo Client displays a message saying the form will be submitted on the next
synchronization.
2. Tap OK.
The form has been added to the Forms Manager cue. Tap manage forms to view
the status of the form you submitted on the Forms Manager page.
Sending the Form Using HotSync
You can send the form to the Web site by performing a HotSync operation with your desktop
computer. AvantGo Client uploads the form to your desktop computer, which connects to
11-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
the Internet and forwards the form to the appropriate Web site. The Web site responds, and
HotSync® for details.
Sending the Form Using a Modem
AvantGo Client uses the modem settings you've provided to connect to AvantGo Server
and send your request to the appropriate Web site. This way, you can get an immediate
response, and you don't have to sync all of the other data on your device. Refer to the Using
AvantGo Client With a Modem section for details.
Displaying the Response
The channel can respond to a form submission in one of two ways:
•
•
It can alter the channel pages that you initially downloaded.
It can send down a separate response page.
Using AvantGo Client With a Modem
You can use your SPT 173x terminal to connect to the Internet or your company's intranet
directly from the device.
Note:Before you can use AvantGo Client with a modem, make sure the
modem is set up properly and that you have network access to your
Internet Service Provider. Refer to Chapter 14, Applications:
Preferences to set up your modem and network access.
Browsing Online
You can use your SPT 173x terminal to browse online when you have an active modem
connection, an active wireless connection, or are continuously syncing cradle connection.
To browse the Internet using AvantGo Client:
1. Tap the
icon to open the AvantGo Client menus. Select Connect from the
Channels menu.
A service connection attempt is made. A flashing vertical bar in the upper right
corner indicates you are online.
11-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: AvantGo Client and Mobile Link
To go to a specific URL:
1. Choose an existing connection or configure a new one and wait for the device to
connect.
2. Tap the Open Page icon.
3. Enter the URL.
4. Tap OK.
Synchronizing With a Modem
If you use a modem with your SPT 173x terminal, you can synchronize your AvantGo
channels without going through HotSync. When you do this, your terminal connects directly
to the AvantGo server through a modem and downloads all channel information just like it
does when you sync using a desktop computer.
To synchronize to the AvantGo server on your SPT 173x terminal, tap the
icon and
select Modem Sync from the Channels menu. AvantGo Client automatically accesses the
modem and connects to AvantGo Server.
Using Connect
You can select the Connect option on the Channels menu to establish a connection with
your online service. To connect using a modem connection, tap the
icon and select
Connect from the Channels menu. The service connection is established.
Using Disconnect on Your SPT 173x Terminal
To disconnect your modem, tap the
icon and select Disconnect from the Channels
menu. The service connection is closed.
11-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
AvantGo Client Menu Commands
AvantGo Client includes menu commands to make it fast and easy to perform tasks. This
section explains the menu commands specific to AvantGo.
Refer to Using Menus on page 3-20 for information about menu commands common to all
of your SPT 1700 terminal applications.
Note:Refer to www.avantgo.com for additional information about these
commands.
Channels Menu
When you select the Channels menu, its commands display on the screen.
Open Page
Opens a page.
Reload Page
Reloads/refreshes a page.
Channel
Manager
Opens the Channel Manager. Displays a list of channels and sizes.
Online Cache
Manager
Opens the Online Cache Manager. Contains a list of online pages in
cache.
Modem Sync
Initiates synchronization of the device to your online service. Refer to
Synchronizing With a Modem on page 11-9 for details.
Connect
Connects to your online service using a modem connection.
Disconnects from your online service.
Disconnect
11-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: AvantGo Client and Mobile Link
Go Menu
When you select the Go menu, its commands display on the screen.
Home
Back
Brings you directly to your home page.
Returns to the previous page.
Advances to the next page.
Forward
Choose Server Displays a list of servers available to this terminal.
Options Menu
When you select the Options menu, its commands display on the screen.
Preferences
Displays a list of preferences you can choose, including show tables,
show images, auto-connect, and enable scanner.
Server
Preferences
Opens the main Mobile Link screen where you specify the name
address, port, user name and password for a particular server.
Font
Preferences
Displays Variable and Fixed font preferences. System Variable is the
font used for most text.
About AvantGo Displays copyright and version information for AvantGo.
11-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Mobile Link
Mobile Link is software that helps your SPT 173x terminal communicate with Web-based
information on a network when you synchronize. You rarely need to use Mobile Link
directly. It is installed as part of AvantGo, and is configured at that time. The only time you
may need to use Mobile Link is to set up the connection to a proxy server or to perform
some server configuration maintenance.
Typically, you synchronize the contents of your SPT 173x terminal with similar contents on
your desktop computer. For example, the SPT 173x has a calendar application that you
synchronize with a calendar application on your desktop to make sure they both have the
same contents. To do this, you connect the SPT 173x terminal to your desktop computer,
and HotSync operation transfers data between the two.
Mobile Link provides a common way for such remote servers to communicate with your
desktop computer and SPT 173x terminal. Once it is installed, your terminal can
synchronize with any server that understands the Mobile Link protocol. To sync through
your desktop computer, all you have to do is perform the HotSync operation as you
normally would. Mobile Link takes care of accessing the remote server and passing data
back and forth between the server and the SPT 173x.
Note:Refer to www.avantgo.com for additional documentation about
configuring and using Mobile Link desktop software.
To access Mobile Link, point to Programs, AvantGo and click Mobile Link.
11-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: AvantGo Client and Mobile Link
Servers Tab
Before configuring any element of Mobile Link, make certain you have chosen the profile
associated with your SPT 173x terminal. Profiles are created when you first sync a device
on a desktop. Refer to Using User Profiles on page 9-6 for details.
The Servers tab is used to add, remove, or modify the server settings for each device
installed on your computer.
Add
Opens a blank version of the Edit Server
Profile panel.
Remove
Removes the selected server from the Server
settings for the currently selected device list
box.
Properties
Opens the Edit Server Profile panel for the
selected server.
Content
Help
Opens a Web browser where you can view
the interface for the selected server.
Opens Mobile Link Online Help.
11-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
The Device profiles drop down lists all of the profiles associated with the desktop computer.
Edit Server Profile Panel
You can use the Edit Server Profile panel to change and/or edit your server address, and
change your account information (user name or password), change your connection
options, and view details about the selected server.
1. Click the Add button or Properties button and the Edit Server Profile panel displays:
Server Address
Enter the name and port of your host server.
Test
Tests the connection between the named
server and your desktop.
11-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: AvantGo Client and Mobile Link
Your Account
Enter the user name and the password for the server. This information allows you to
authenticate a connection with a server in a single sync.
Set Password
Opens the Change Password dialog where
you can enter your password as it appears on
the server you entered in the Address field.
Connection Options
Set and change sync connection options. This includes enabling/disabling a server to
connect during a sync, refreshing or not refreshing content at the next sync, or enabling a
secure connection to the named server.
Connect to this server
during device
synchronizations
Enables or disables the connection between
the server and your device during the next
sync.
Refresh all content at next Overrides the refresh settings for the server
sync
syncing with your device. All of the content
(regardless of the individual settings on
channels and applications) will refresh.
Connect to this server
using a secure protocol
Mobile Link automatically detects whether the
server is a secure or unsecure server. If the
server is secure, this checkbox is
automatically enabled.
Server Information
Displays the details of address, port, and server name for the server named in the
Hostname field. It also provides the location on the Internet or intranet where you can
configure your account settings.
11-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Connection Tab
The Connection tab is used to autodetect and change your connection settings, and view
your computer's proxy settings:
Tap here to
change proxy
server settings
Change
Changes the settings for your HTTP, SOCKS
or Secure server.
Autodetect Now
Show Details
Automatically detects a device’s network
connection.
Becomes available when an autodetect
attempt is made and opens a log of the
connection. You can copy this log into another
application by clicking the Copy log to
clipboard button and pasting the text into the
application of your choice.
11-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: AvantGo Client and Mobile Link
Advanced Connection Settings
To set up proxy servers:
1. Tap the Change button. The Advanced Connection Settings screen displays:
2. Enter the unique address of your server into the Address field of the Proxy Servers
box. The address entry should be the same as the address for the server used by
your organization.
3. Enter a port number in the Port field.
The Use HTTP authentication checkbox is enabled. HTTP authentication enables
user name and password verification.When this checkbox is active, the Password
field is enabled.
4. Enter a password.
5. To enable a connection when using a SOCKS server, enter its address and port.
6. Enter the address for the server that provides secure SSL connections.
7. Enter settings for exceptions to those set in the previous section.
11-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Using the Mobile Link Application on Your
SPT 173x Terminal
A component of Mobile Link software is installed on your SPT 173x terminal when you
install AvantGo. This software allows you to synchronize the SPT 173x terminal with a
remote server either by going through a sync operation or by connecting directly to the
server through a modem attached to the terminal. You must not delete Mobile Link or its
related files from your terminal.
As with its desktop software, Mobile Link can usually complete its job with no user
intervention. However, you may need to perform some maintenance tasks.
To access the available servers:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon on the SPT 173x terminal to open the Applications Launcher.
icon to open Mobile Link.
Note:You can also access Mobile Link via the Server Preferences setting
on the AvantGo Options menu.
3. Tap the Server drop down list to display available servers.
Enabling a Secure Connection on Your SPT 173x Terminal
When you enable secure connections, Mobile Link uses the HTTPS protocol to connect to
a server during a HotSync.
The following are pre-requisites for connecting using secure protocols:
•
Your system administrator has installed the security module add-on to the AvantGo
Server and has enabled the use of secure protocols.
•
•
You have entered a secure server as the hostname.
You have synchronized your device at least once with the secure server.
To enable a secure connection:
1. Tap the
icon to open Mobile Link.
2. Choose the server from the pop-up list.
3. Check the Connect securely box.
4. Tap OK to return to AvantGo Client.
11-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: AvantGo Client and Mobile Link
Disabling a Server on Your SPT 173x Terminal
You can disable a server from your SPT 173x terminal directly.
To disable a server on your terminal:
1. Tap the
icon to open Mobile Link.
2. Choose the server that you want to disable from the pop-up list.
3. Deselect the Enabled box.
Modem Syncing With a Server Using Your SPT 173x Terminal
To synchronize with Mobile Link servers on your SPT 173x terminal:
1. Tap the
icon to open Mobile Link.
2. Tap the Modem Sync button.
Setting up a New Server on Your SPT 173x Terminal
There are two ways that you can set up a new server on your terminal: from within AvantGo
Client, and from within Mobile Link. The following sections provide instructions for setting
up a new server using both of these methods.
Note:Most applications that use Mobile Link automatically add necessary
server configurations for you. You rarely have to add a server
configuration manually.
From Mobile Link:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon and tap
icon.
icon and select New Server from the Server menu.
Enter the Server Name, Address, Port, User Name, and Password.
From AvantGo:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon and tap the AvantGo
icon.
icon and select Server Preferences from the Options menu.
Enter the Server Name, Address, Port, User Name, and Password.
11-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Removing a Server on Your SPT 173x Terminal
To remove a server on your terminal:
1. Tap the
2. Select the server you wish to delete.
3. Tap the icon.
icon to open Mobile Link.
4. Select Delete from the Server menu.
Refreshing Content on Your SPT 173x Terminal
In rare instances, you might need to refresh all data from a server.
To refresh all content on your terminal from AvantGo:
1. Tap the
icon, then select Server Preferences from the Options menu.
2. Choose the server and select the Refresh All Content checkbox.
Note:Mobile Link displays this screen when the
icon is selected.
11-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: AvantGo Client and Mobile Link
Mobile Link Menu Commands
Mobile Link includes menu commands to make it fast and easy to perform tasks. This
section explains the menu commands specific to Mobile Link.
Refer to Using Menus on page 3-20 for information about menu commands common to all
of your SPT 1700 terminal applications.
Note:Refer to www.avantgo.com for additional information about these
commands.
Server Menu
When you select the Server menu, its commands display on the screen.
New Server
Delete
Manually adds a new server configuration manually.
Removes a server from the terminal’s configuration.
Options Menu
When you select the Options menu, its commands display on the screen.
Modem Sync
Synchronizes the AvantGo server with the SPT 173x terminal.
About Mobile Link Displays Mobile Link version information.
11-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Troubleshooting
If you do not see any channels or the channels you expect, check the following:
•
•
If you have just installed AvantGo Client on your SPT 173x terminal, you must re-
sync to synchronize your SPT173x terminal and the host.
If you must access AvantGo Server through a proxy server or a firewall, AvantGo
attempts to set up the connection through the proxy server during the installation
process, but sometimes it fails to do so. If it fails, you must set up the AvantGo
connection manually.
•
•
You may not have Mobile Link installed on your device.
Mobile Link is an application that helps AvantGo Client access AvantGo Server,
You don't have Mobile Link installed on your desktop.
If you connect to AvantGo Server through a HotSync operation, you must have
Mobile Link both on the device and on your desktop computer. Go to your desktop
computer and look in Start, Programs, AvantGo for an application named Mobile
Link. If this option exists, you probably have Mobile Link installed. If you do not
have Mobile Link installed, refer to Using the Mobile Link Application on Your SPT
173x Terminal on page 11-18.
11-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Setting Up Mail on the Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Synchronizing Mail with Your E-Mail Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Opening Mail on Your SPT 1700 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Viewing Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Message Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Displaying Full Header Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Creating Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Looking Up an Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Adding Message Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Setting a Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Sending a Blind Carbon Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Adding a Signature to Your Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Editing an Unsent Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Draft Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Filing a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Restoring a Message From the Deleted Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Purging Deleted Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Message List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Date Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Sorting the Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
HotSync Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Creating Special Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
12-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defining Filter Strings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
High-Priority Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Truncating Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Mail Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
Message Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29
12-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Mail
Introduction
The Mail application enables you to manage your e-mail while away from your desk. Mail
synchronizes the mail in your desktop e-mail application with the mail on your SPT 1700
terminal.
For example, if you read a message on your SPT 1700 terminal and leave it in your inbox,
your next HotSync operation marks it as read on your desktop e-mail. Similarly, if you delete
messages from your SPT Mail, your next HotSync operation also deletes the messages
from your desktop e-mail application — so you never have to delete messages twice.
With Mail, you can:
•
Use your SPT 1700 terminal to send and/or retrieve e-mail messages from your
desktop e-mail application.
•
•
View, delete, file and/or reply to incoming mail.
Create outgoing messages as well as drafts of messages that you can complete
later.
•
Create simple or complex filters, which allow you to decide the type of e-mail that
your SPT 1700 terminal retrieves from your desktop e-mail application.
Setting Up Mail on the Desktop
Before you use Mail for the first time, make sure your desktop e-mail application is up and
running. You must also set up the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software for use with your
desktop e-mail application.
Note:The following instructions assume that you have already installed
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software on your computer and that
you did not set up Mail during the installation. If you have not yet
installed the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software, the
installation procedure will prompt you to set up Mail as part of the
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software installation.
To set up Mail:
1. Click Start on the Windows desktop to open the Start menu.
2. Point to Programs, point to Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop, then click SPT Mail
Setup to start the setup procedure.
12-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to set up your SPT 1700 terminal for use with
your desktop e-mail application.
To select HotSync options:
1. Click the
icon in the Windows System Tray to open the HotSync menu.
2. Click Custom from the HotSync menu to open the Custom dialog.
3. Click Mail in the Custom list box.
4. Click the Change button. The Change HotSync Action dialog displays:
5. Select one of the following settings:
Synchronize Synchronizes the mail on your SPT 1700 terminal and your desktop e-
the files
mail application.
Desktop
overwrites
handheld
Replaces the mail on your SPT 1700 terminal with the mail in your
desktop e-mail application. Use this option only if, for some reason, the
two inboxes get out of sync. This setting applies for only one HotSync
operation, then reverts back to the default setting.
Do Nothing Turns off communication between your SPT 1700 terminal and
desktop e-mail application. This setting applies for only one HotSync
operation, then reverts back to the default setting.
Set As
Default
Changes the default setting on an ongoing basis. (When you first set
up Mail, Synchronize the files is the default setting.)
Tip: To turn off mail, check Do Nothing, then check the Set as Default check box.
12-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Mail
To change your Mail setup options:
1. Click the icon in the Windows System Tray to open the HotSync menu.
2. Click Custom from the HotSync menu to open the Custom dialog.
Tip: You can also click Custom from the HotSync menu in the Symbol Palm
Terminal Desktop software.
3. Click Mail in the Conduit list to indicate that you want to change these settings.
4. Click the Change button to open the Change HotSync Action dialog for the Mail
conduit.
5. Modify your settings as needed.
dialog.
Synchronizing Mail with Your E-Mail Application
After you have enabled and configured Mail, perform a HotSync operation to synchronize
Mail with your desktop e-mail application. For a complete explanation of how to use the
HotSync feature, refer to the Chapter 9, Applications: HotSync®.
Opening Mail on Your SPT 1700 Terminal
To open mail:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon to open the Applications Launcher.
icon to display the Message List screen.
Viewing Messages
The Message List lists your incoming messages, who sent them and the date they were
received. Messages you’ve read appear with a check next them and high-priority
messages appear in bold.
12-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
To view a message:
Previously read
1. Tap a message in the list to open it.
Header mode icons
Recipient
Subject
Sender
Time and date sent
Message body
Messages display by default in the abbreviated mode. To switch from the
Information on page 12-6.
2. Tap the Done button to close the message and return to the Message List.
Message Fonts
You can modify the way messages display by changing the font (text) style. Refer to
Choosing Fonts on page 3-23 for details.
Displaying Full Header Information
By default, Mail displays abbreviated header information, which includes only the From and
Subject fields. The full header provides complete information about the sender, receiver
12-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Mail
and CC recipients, in addition to the subject and date the message was created. Mail uses
the header type you select for all your messages.
To display full header information:
1. Open a message.
2. Tap the Complete Header icon to display the full header.
Complete Header icon
Abbreviated Header icon
3. To display the abbreviated header, tap the Abbreviated Header icon.
Creating Messages
Create messages with your SPT 1700 terminal the same way you create messages with
your desktop e-mail application: identify the recipient(s) of the message, define a subject
and create the body of the message.
Create original messages and replies in the New Message screen. All messages must
contain information in the To and Subject fields.
12-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
To create a message:
1. Tap the New button in the Message List screen to display the New Message
screen.
Tap New
Note:You can also display the New Message screen by tapping New on
the Message menu.
2. Use the on-screen keyboard or Graffiti character strokes to enter the e-mail
address of the recipient. The cursor indicates where new text will display.
Note:Enter the address as if you are entering it from your desktop e-mail
application. For example, network users sending a message to a
user on the same network do not need to add Internet information,
such as @3com.com.
12-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Mail
3. To send a carbon copy of this message to additional recipients, tap the CC field,
then enter the e-mail addresses of the additional recipients, separating the
addresses with a comma followed by a space.
4. Tap the Subj field, then enter a subject for your message.
5. Tap the Body field, then enter the body text.
Tap the name of the field to open
Tap to return to New Message screen
To reply to a message:
1. Tap a message in the Message List to display it on the screen.
2. Tap the Reply button to open the Reply Options screen.
3. Select who you want to receive the reply: only the Sender, All recipients and the
sender, or Forward the message to someone else.
4. Select whether you want to Include original text and Comment original text.
5. Tap OK to close the Reply Options screen and display the New Message screen.
6. Enter your reply text.
12-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Note:You have several message options including setting the priority.
Refer to Adding Message Details on page 12-11 for details.
7. Tap Send to place your reply in the Outbox.
Looking Up an Address
To identify the recipient of a message, enter that person’s e-mail address in the appropriate
field of the Message screen. You can do this either by entering the data directly into the field
or using the Look Up command to access the information in your Address Book.
To look up an address:
1. On the New Message screen, tap either the To or CC field and expand it.
2. Enter a few letters of the address you want to find.
3. Tap the Lookup button.
4. If the letters you enter identify a unique listing from your Address Book, your SPT
1700 terminal completes the address for you. If not, the Lookup screen displays.
Note:You can also open the Look Up screen in the New Message screen
by tapping Lookup from the Options menu or by using the Command
stroke /L.
Tap here
5. Enter the first letter of the entry you want to find to scroll to the first entry that begins
with that letter. If you write an additional letter, the list scrolls to the first entry that
12-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Mail
starts with those two letters. For example, writing a “c” might scroll to “Carter,” and
writing “ch” might scroll farther to “chu.”
6. Tap an address to select it, then tap the Add button to enter the address in the field.
Tap to select
Tap here to enter address in field
7. Tape Done to return to the New Message screen.
Adding Message Details
Before you send your message, you can attach additional attributes (called message
details) to your message, such as a blind carbon copy, or flagging the message as high-
mail application does not support the message detail you select, your SPT 1700 terminal
cannot attach that attribute to your message.
Priority
BCC
Flags a message as high, normal or low priority.
Creates a blind carbon copy field in the New Message screen.
Signature
Attaches previously defined text as a signature block. Refer to Adding a
Signature to Your Message on page 12-13 for details.
Confirm
Read
Requests a confirmation telling you when the message was read.
Requests a confirmation telling you when the message was delivered.
Confirm
Delivery
Note:The Priority and BCC settings are valid only for the current message
and must be set with each subsequent message you create.
12-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Setting a Priority
To set a priority for your message:
1. Tap the Details button in the New Message screen to open the Message Details
screen.
Tap here
2. Tap the Priority pick list and select the priority you want.
Tap here
Tap to select priority
3. Tap the OK button to confirm your selection and return to the New Message screen.
Note:Your SPT 1700 terminal can flag messages with a specific priority
only if your desktop e-mail application supports this feature.
Sending a Blind Carbon Copy
To add a BCC field to your message:
1. Tap the Message Details button and select the BCC check box in the Message
Details screen. This will add the BCC field to the New Message screen.
12-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Mail
2. Tap the OK button to confirm your selection and return to the New Message screen.
BCC field
3. Tap the BCC field and enter the address.
Adding a Signature to Your Message
By defining information as a signature, you can automatically attach it to the close of e-mail
items and avoid recreating the information for each e-mail item. A signature can contain
information on you or your company—such as your name, address, phone and fax
numbers, and any other text you want to include.
Adding a signature to your message is a two-part process: first, you must create your
signature, then you must select the signature option from the Message Detail screen.
To create a signature:
1. Tap the
icon to open the Mail menus.
2. Tap Preferences from the Options menu to open the Preferences screen.
Add signature
text here
3. Tap in the Signature Text field and enter up to six lines of text.
4. Tap the OK button to confirm your selection and return to the previous screen.
12-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
To add a signature to your message:
1. Tap the Details button in the New Message screen to open the Message Details
screen.
2. Select the Signature check box to add a signature to the end of your message.
3. Tap the OK button to confirm your selection and return to the New Message screen.
Note:The signature block does not display in your message; only your
recipient sees the signature block.
Requesting Confirmations
To receive a confirmation when your message is read:
1. Tap the Details button in the New Message screen to open the Message Details
screen.
2. Select the Confirm Read check box to request a confirmation when the recipient
reads your message.
3. Tap the OK button to confirm your selection and return to the New Message screen.
To receive a confirmation when your message is delivered:
1. Tap the Details button in the New Message screen to open the Message Details
screen.
2. Select the Confirm Delivery check box to request a confirmation that the recipient
received your message.
3. Tap the OK button to confirm your selection and return to the New Message screen.
Sending Messages
When you send messages from your SPT 1700 terminal, it stores them in the Outbox folder
until the next time you synchronize your SPT 1700 terminal with your computer. During
synchronization, all messages stored in the Outbox folder are transferred to the Outbox
folder in your desktop e-mail application. Messages created on your SPT 1700 terminal are
transmitted the next time you send mail from your desktop e-mail application.
After you create a message, tap the Send button in the New Message screen to send it.
12-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Mail
Editing an Unsent Message
You can edit or make changes to a message that has not been sent, as long as you have
not yet performed a HotSync operation. When you edit a message, your SPT 1700 terminal
removes the message from the Outbox folder and takes you back to the New Message
screen, where you can edit the message and resend it, save it as a draft, or cancel it.
To retrieve a message:
1. In the Message List screen, tap Outbox from the pick list in the upper-right corner
to display the messages contained in the Outbox.
Tap to display folder list
2. Tap the message you want to retrieve to display the message.
Tap here
to select
message
Tap to
modify
message
3. Tap the Edit button to remove the message from the Outbox folder and place it
back in the New Message screen.
4. Edit the message as desired. To return the message to the Outbox tap Send.
12-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Draft Messages
There are times when you may not want to immediately send a message you compose —
for example, you may want to add additional information before sending it. Your SPT 1700
terminal stores such messages in the Draft folder until you are ready to edit them. When
you edit a draft, it becomes a new message again.
Note:When you’re creating or editing a message, you can also save a
message as a draft by canceling it. When you cancel a message, the
SPT 1700 terminal opens a dialog asking if you want to save the
message. If you tap the Yes button, your SPT 1700 terminal saves
a draft of your message.
To save a message as a draft:
1. Create a message in the New Message screen.
2. Tap the
icon to open the Mail menus.
3. Tap Save Draft from the Message menu to move the message to the Draft folder.
To edit a message saved as a draft:
1. In the Message List screen, tap Draft from the pick list in the upper-right corner to
display a list of the messages in the Draft folder.
2. Tap the draft you want to display.
Tap to select
message
Tap to edit
draft in the
New Message
screen
3. Tap the Edit button to move your draft to the New Message screen.
4. Enter your changes, then either save it again as a draft or tap the Send button to
move the message to your Outbox folder.
12-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Mail
Filing a Message
Your SPT 1700 terminal can store any message you receive or create in the Filed folder. A
back-up copy of the Filed folder is stored on your computer hard drive, but the contents of
this folder do not automatically synchronize with your desktop e-mail application during a
HotSync operation.
To file a message:
1. Open a message.
2. Tap the
icon to open the Mail menus.
3. Tap File from the Message menu to display the Message File Options screen.
4. Tap No to save the message and move it to the Filed folder or tap Yes to file the
message and keep a copy in the Inbox.
To remove a message you created from the Filed folder:
1. In the Message List screen, tap Filed from the pick list in the upper-right corner to
display the contents of the Filed folder.
2. Tap the message you want to restore.
3. Tap the Edit button to display and modify the message.
Note:After you display and modify the message, you can send it, save it
as a draft, or return it to the Filed folder.
Deleting Messages
Your SPT 1700 terminal stores deleted message in the Deleted folder until you perform the
next HotSync operation. If you delete a message from SPT 1700 terminal, it is deleted on
your desktop e-mail application after you perform a HotSync operation.
To delete a message:
1. Open the message you want to delete.
2. Tap the Delete button.
3. If you selected the Preference option to confirm message deletion, tap the Yes
button to confirm that you want to delete the current message.
12-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Restoring a Message From the Deleted Folder
You can reverse the deletion of a message (by removing it from the Deleted folder) as long
as you have neither performed a HotSync operation nor purged the contents of the Deleted
folder.
To restore a message you received from the Deleted folder:
1. In the Message List screen, tap Deleted from the pick list in the upper-right corner
to display the contents of the Deleted folder.
2. Tap the message you want to restore.
3. Tap the Undelete button to move the selected message to the Inbox and mark it as
read.
To remove a message you created from the Deleted folder:
1. In the Message List screen, tap Deleted from the pick list in the upper-right corner
to display the contents of the Deleted folder.
2. Tap the message you want to restore.
3. Tap the Edit button to display and modify the message.
Note:After you display and modify the message, you can send it or save
it as a draft.
Purging Deleted Messages
Because your SPT 1700 terminal stores deleted messages in the Deleted folder until you
perform a HotSync operation, deleted messages can monopolize storage space. To avoid
or correct this problem, you can purge the contents of your Deleted folder. Messages that
you purge are still deleted from your desktop e-mail application during the next HotSync
operation.
To purge the contents of the Deleted folder:
1. Tap the
icon to open the Mail menus.
12-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Mail
2. Tap Purge Deleted from the Message menu. The following alert displays:
3. Tap the Yes button to confirm that you want to purge the contents of the Deleted
folder.
Note:You cannot restore messages after you purge them.
Message List Options
Message List Options enable you to manage the way the Message List displays
information.
Folders
category. The Message List displays the messages in the folder you select. Folders provide
an efficient way to manage the mail you send and receive.
Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner to open the following list of folders:
Inbox
Contains the mail from your desktop e-mail application Inbox, minus any
that you have excluded using filtering options. Refer to Creating Special
Filters on page 12-22 for details.
Outbox
Contains the mail you created and sent on the SPT 1700 terminal since
the last HotSync operation.
Deleted
Filed
Contains the messages you deleted since the last HotSync operation.
Contains the messages you are storing on the SPT 1700 terminal.
Draft
Contains the messages you created using the SPT 1700 terminal but are
not yet ready to send.
12-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Date Column
The Date Column is optional in the Message List. By default, the Date Column is hidden to
increase the available screen space.
To show the Date Column:
1. Tap the Show button in the Message List to open the Show Options screen.
Tap Show
2. Select the Show Date check box to show the Date Column.
3. Tap OK to close the Show Options screen and return to the Message List.
Sorting the Message List
You can sort the Message List by the date it was sent, by sender or by subject.
Note:High-priority messages always display first, no matter how you sort
your message list.
To sort the Message List:
1. Tap the Show button in the Message List to open the Show Options screen.
2. Tap the Sort by pick list and select one of the following options:
Date
Sorts messages by date and displays the most recent message at the
top of the screen.
Sender
Sorts messages by the sender’s user name and displays them in
ascending alphabetical order —based on the first word of the sender
field.
12-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Mail
Subject
Sorts messages by subject and displays them in ascending alphabetical
order based on the first word of the subject field.
3. Tap OK to close the Show Options screen and return to the Message List.
HotSync Options
HotSync Options enable you to manage your e-mail more effectively by selecting which
messages download when you synchronize your computer and your SPT 1700 terminal.
Different settings can be defined for local and remote synchronization. For example, you
may want to download all of your messages during local synchronization and only urgent
messages during remote synchronization. Once defined, your SPT 1700 terminal
determines if synchronization is occurring locally or remotely and uses the appropriate
HotSync Options settings.
To activate the HotSync Options screen:
1. Tap the
icon to open the Mail menus.
2. Tap HotSync Options from the Options menu to open the HotSync Options screen.
3. Tap the Settings for pick list and select Local HotSync or Remote HotSync.
Tap here to
display
HotSync
options
Note:For more information about Local and Remote HotSync operations,
refer to Chapter 9, Applications: HotSync®.
12-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
4. Tap the filtering option you want to apply.
All
During synchronization, all messages in your desktop e-mail Inbox
synchronize with your SPT 1700 terminal and all messages in your
SPT 1700 terminal Outbox are sent to your desktop e-mail application.
Send Only
Filter
During synchronization, only the messages in your SPT 1700 terminal
to their final destination.
During synchronization, all messages in your SPT 1700 terminal
Outbox are sent to your desktop e-mail application, and messages in
your desktop e-mail Inbox that meet specific criteria download to your
SPT 1700 terminal. When you select the Filter setting, the HotSync
Options screen opens and displays additional filter settings. Refer to
Creating Special Filters on page 12-22 for details.
Unread
During synchronization, only unread messages download to your SPT
1700 terminal from your desktop e-mail Inbox, and all messages in
your SPT 1700 Outbox are sent to your desktop e-mail application.
Note:The All setting does not mean that all information included in each
message downloads to your SPT 1700 terminal. Truncation settings
(explained in a following section) for long messages still apply. Also,
Mail never downloads any attachments to your SPT 1700 terminal.
The message and any text information display, but the attachment is
left in your desktop e-mail application.
5. If you selected All, Send Only or Unread, tap the OK button to confirm your
selection and close the HotSync Options screen. If you selected Filter, continue to
the next section.
Creating Special Filters
You can create special filters to control the type of messages that download to your SPT
1700 terminal during synchronization. Special filters tell your SPT 1700 terminal what to
look for in the To, From, and Subject header fields to single out certain messages.
12-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Mail
1. To specify filter options, tap the Filter box in the HotSync Options screen to display
the filter settings.
Tap here to
display
Filter
options
Ignoring or Receiving Messages
To define whether to ignore or receive messages that match the information you specify,
tap the pick list in the middle of the HotSync Options screen and select one of the following
settings:
Tap here
Select Filter option
Ignore
Tells your SPT 1700 terminal to exclude the messages that meet the
Messages
defined criteria and download all other messages during
Containing synchronization. In general, this filter downloads more mail during
synchronization because it blocks only one defined subset of mail.
12-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Retrieve
Tells your SPT 1700 terminal to include only the messages that meet
Only Msgs the defined criteria and to ignore all other messages during
Containing synchronization. This filter may block more mail during synchronization
because it downloads only one subset of mail.
Defining Filter Strings
Messages are filtered based on the information contained in their To, From and Subject
header fields. The information that defines what your SPT 1700 terminal is looking for is
called a filter string. You create a filter string by listing the words you want your SPT 1700
terminal to find and separating them with either a comma or a space. Each word in the filter
string is joined by an implicit OR; do not enter connecting words such as AND or OR.
To create a more complex filter, you can define filter strings for the To, From and Subject
fields simultaneously. Your SPT 1700 terminal joins the filter strings for these fields using
an implicit AND, so do not add connecting words. Your SPT 1700 terminal does that for you.
For example, suppose you want to receive only messages from John Smith
([email protected]) or Jack Jones ([email protected]) concerning the Apollo Project. You
would create the following filter strings:
To field filter string: [email protected], [email protected]
Subject field filter string: Apollo Project
Your SPT 1700 terminal interprets this as, “Accept messages about the Apollo Project from
John Smith or Jack Jones. Do not accept messages from other people. Do not accept
messages from John or Jack about any other subject.”
When you define a string, note that your SPT 1700 terminal searches for any instance of
that collection of characters. For example, if you create a filter that retrieves only messages
containing the string “info,” your SPT 1700 terminal considers “info,” “rainforest” and
“kinfolk” appropriate matches.
12-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Mail
To define filter strings:
1. Tap a header field in the HotSync Options screen.
Tap here to
insert cursor
2. Enter your filter string for the selected header field using commas or spaces to
separate the words, not AND or OR.
3. If your string exceeds the length of the field, tap the name of the field to display the
Notes screen for that header field. For more information about header field Notes
screens, refer to Creating Messages on page 12-7.
Enter filter data
Tap Done to return to
HotSync Options
4. Tap the Done button to return to the HotSync Options screen.
5. Tap the OK button to confirm your filter strings and close the HotSync Options
screen.
12-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
High-Priority Messages
The Retrieve All High Priority setting lets you retrieve messages marked high-priority, even
if those messages would have been blocked by a defined filter.
To retrieve high-priority messages:
1. Tap the Filter box in the HotSync Options screen to display additional filter options.
2. Select the Retrieve All High Priority check box to retrieve all messages marked
high-priority.
Tap
check
box
3. Tap OK to confirm your selection and close the HotSync Options screen.
Note:This setting is applicable only if your e-mail application has the
capacity to flag high-priority messages.
Truncating Messages
The Truncate feature lets you set a point at which long messages truncate when
downloading to your SPT 1700 terminal. By default, this Truncate value is 4000 characters.
By truncating long messages, you reduce the time it takes to synchronize your desktop e-
mail and SPT 1700 Mail as well as the amount of storage space e-mail uses on your SPT
1700 terminal.
Note:Truncation is separate and independent from filtering.
12-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Mail
To truncate messages:
1. Tap the Truncate button in the HotSync Options screen to open the Truncate
Options screen.
Tap to
select
maximum
length
Tap
Truncate
2. Tap to select the truncation setting you want. The values range from 250 characters
to 8000 characters.
Tip: If you select a low truncation value, you will have more room on your SPT 1700
terminal to store messages.
3. Tap OK to confirm your selection and return to the HotSync Options screen.
12-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Mail Menu Commands
The Mail application includes menu commands to make it fast and easy to perform common
file and editing tasks. Refer to Using Menus on page 3-20 for information about menu
commands that are common to all of your SPT 1700 terminal applications.
Message Menu
The Message menu varies based on whether you are viewing a message, creating a
message or viewing the Message List.
MessageMenu
when viewing
Message List
Message Menu
when creating a
New Message
Message Menu when
Viewing a Message
New
Displays the Create Message screen, where you can create a new e-mail
message.
Save Draft Saves the current message as a draft and moves it to the Draft folder where
it is stored until you send or delete it.
File
Moves the current message to the Filed folder where it is stored until you
delete it.
Delete
Moves the current message to the Deleted folder. Your SPT 1700 terminal
stores deleted messages in the Deleted folder until you perform a HotSync
operation, which permanently removes deleted messages.
12-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Mail
Purge
Deleted
Empties (purges) the contents of the Deleted folder. Your SPT 1700 terminal
stores deleted messages in the Deleted folder until you perform a HotSync
operation. Purging deleted messages frees up storage space on your SPT
1700 terminal before the next HotSync operation.
Note: The Purge Deleted command displays an alert, prompting you to
confirm that you want to purge all messages from the Deleted folder. If you
tap Yes, all deleted messages are purged from the memory of your SPT
1700 terminal.
Important: Messages that you purge are deleted from your desktop e-mail
application during the next HotSync operation.
Options Menu
When you select the Options menu, its menu commands vary depending on whether you
are creating or editing a message.
Options Menu when viewing
Message List
Options Menu when
viewing a New Message
Font
Enables you to adjust the size of the text on the screen. This can make
it easier to read the text or to fit more text in the display area.
Preferences
Enables you to define a specific string of text as a signature and to
select whether or not your SPT 1700 terminal displays an alert when you
delete a message.
HotSync
Options
Opens a screen, where you can select different ways to filter messages
synchronized between your desktop e-mail application and your SPT
1700 terminal. You can create simple or complex filters to control the
type of messages downloaded to your SPT 1700 terminal. In addition,
you can define separate settings for local and remote synchronizations.
12-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Look Up
Opens a screen, which contains the Address List from your Address
Book. By tapping a selection, you enter that address into the To field of
any message you are creating.
Note: The Look Up command is available only when you are creating a
message.
About Mail
Shows version (revision) information for the Mail application.
12-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Opening the Memo Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Creating a New Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Reviewing Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Arranging Memos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Manually Arranging the Memo List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Choosing a Memo Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Marking a Private Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Deleting a Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Memo Pad Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Record Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
13-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Memo Pad
Introduction
The Memo Pad provides a place to take notes that are not associated with Date Book,
Address Book or To Do items.
With the Memo Pad, you can:
•
•
Take notes or write any kind of message on your SPT 1700 terminal.
Drag and drop memos into popular computer applications like Microsoft Word,
when you synchronize using Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software and
HotSync technology.
•
•
Assign categories for memos. This enables you to quickly view your business-
related memos, personal memos or any other category that you define.
Quickly jot down phone numbers and other types of information. Later, you can
copy and paste this information to other applications.
Opening the Memo Pad
To open the Memo Pad:
1. Press the Memo Pad button on the front panel of the SPT 1700 terminal to display
the Memo List screen.
Memo Pad button
Tip: Press the Memo Pad button repeatedly to cycle through the categories in
which you have memos.
13-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Creating a New Memo
A memo is the record where you enter, review and modify the individual Memo Pad entries.
A memo can contain up to 4,000 characters; the number of memos you can store is
dependent only on the memory available on your SPT 1700 terminal.
To create a new memo:
1. Open the Memo Pad application.
2. Tap the New button to create a new memo.
Tap New
Note:In the Memo List screen, you can also begin writing in
the Graffiti writing area to create a new memo. The first letter is
automatically capitalized and begins your new memo.
3. Enter the text you want to appear in the memo. Use the carriage return stroke to
move down to new lines in the memo.
4. After you finish, tap the Done button to return to the Memo List screen.
13-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Memo Pad
Reviewing Memos
Each time you create a memo, the first line of the memo displays in the Memo List screen.
This makes it easy to locate and review your memos.
To review the contents of a memo:
1. Tap the text of the memo that appears in the Memo List screen to display the memo
on the screen.
Tap a
memo to
review its
contents
2. Review or edit the text in the memo. If the message is more than one page, a scroll
bar will display for easy navigation. If the message is longer than one page, use the
Options menu items to navigate.
3. Tap the Done button to save your changes to the memo and return to the Memo
List screen.
Arranging Memos
The Memo Preferences screen enables you to sort your memos alphabetically or in any
order that you want.
To select a sort option:
1. In the Memo List screen, tap the
icon to open the Memo Pad menus.
2. Tap Preferences from the Options menu to open the Memo Preferences screen.
13-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
3. Tap the Sort by pick list and choose Manual or Alphabetic.
4. Tap the OK button to close the Memo Preferences screen and activate your setting.
Manually Arranging the Memo List
If you choose the Manual option for the Sort by setting, you can rearrange the order of the
memos in the Memo List screen. Your SPT 1700 terminal renumbers all the memos to
reflect the new order.
Note:The Manual setting of the Memo Preferences is not transferred to
the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop. If you choose to display your
memos alphabetically on the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop and
then perform a HotSync operation, the memos are still arranged in
the order defined in the Memo Preferences setting.
To rearrange the order of your memos:
1. Select the Manual option in the Preferences screen as described in the previous
procedure.
2. In the Memo List screen, tap and drag the memo to a new location in the list. When
location.
Choosing a Memo Category
Categories are used to file individual memos into groups for easy review. You can assign
and edit categories using the Categories pick list (in the upper-right corner of the screen)
or the Details screen. Refer to Using Categories on page 3-24 for a complete description
of categories.
Marking a Private Memo
You can designate a specific memo as “private.” When you activate the Security features,
your SPT 1700 terminal hides all private entries and you must enter a password to display
them on the screen.
13-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Memo Pad
To mark a memo as private:
1. Tap the memo you want to mark as private to display it on the screen.
2. Tap the Details button to open the Memo Details screen for that memo.
3. Select the Private check box.
4. Tap the OK button to close the Memo Details screen and return to the memo
screen.
Deleting a Memo
There are three ways to delete a memo: simply delete the text of the memo, use the Menu
Command (as described in the Record Menu on page 13-8) or use the Memo Details
screen.
To delete a memo with the Memo Details screen:
1. Tap the memo that you want to delete to display it on the screen.
2. Tap the Details button to open the Memo Details screen.
3. Tap the Delete button to open the Delete Memo alert.
4. Tap the OK button to confirm that you want to delete the current memo.
13-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Memo Pad Menu Commands
The Memo Pad includes menu commands to make it fast and easy to perform common file
and editing tasks. Refer to Using Menus on page 3-20 for information about menu
commands that are common to all SPT 1700 terminal applications.
Record Menu
When you select the Record menu, its commands display on screen:
Record Menu when viewing
Memo List
Record Menu when viewing
the Memo screen
Beam Category Beams all memos in the current category to another terminal through
the IR port.
New Memo
Creates a new memo.
Delete Memo
Opens an alert screen, prompting you to confirm that you want to
delete the current memo. Tap the OK button to delete the memo from
your SPT 1700 terminal, or tap the Cancel button to close the alert
screen and keep the memo.
Note:By default your SPT 1700 terminal removes the memo from the
Memo List, but retains a copy of the memo and transfers it to an
archive file on your computer the next time you perform a HotSync
operation. To remove the memo completely, clear the Save archive
copy on PC check box.
Beam Memo
Beams the current memo to another SPT 1700 terminal through the IR
port.
13-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Memo Pad
Options Menu
When you select the Options menu, its commands display on screen.
Options Menu when
viewing Memo List
Options menu when
viewing the Memo Screen
Font
font (text) style for your Memo Pad entries. Refer to Choosing
Fonts on page 3-23 for details.
Preferences
Security
Activates the Memo Preferences screen and enables you to define
the sort order for your memos.
Opens the Change Security screen where you can change the
security of the open memo. Refer to Chapter 15, Applications:
Security for details.
Phone Lookup
Activates the Phone Lookup feature, described in Using Phone
Lookup on page 4-4.
About Memo Pad
Shows version (revision) information for the Memo Pad
application.
13-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
13-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Buttons Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Pen Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
HotSync Buttons Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Connection Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Digitizer Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Formats Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Country Default. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Time, Date, Week Start and Numbers Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
General Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Setting the Current Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Setting the Current Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Auto-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Stay On In Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Trigger Wake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Overall, System, Alarm and Game Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Beam Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
14-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Preferences and Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop TCP/IP Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Adding Connection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Connecting to Your Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Idle Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
Creating a Login Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
Network Preferences Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
Service Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
TCP/IP Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
Owner Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
ShortCuts Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
Creating a ShortCut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
Editing a ShortCut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
Deleting a ShortCut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
14-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Preferences
Introduction
The Preferences screens enable you to customize the configuration options on your SPT
1700terminal.
With the Preferences screens, you can:
•
Set the current date and time, the auto shut-off interval, and the overall, system,
alarm and game sounds.
•
•
•
Set the display format for dates, times and numbers.
Configure your SPT 1700 series terminal for use with a modem.
Assign your name, phone number and other owner information to your SPT 1700
series terminal.
•
Assign different applications to the buttons on the front panel of your SPT 1700
series terminal.
•
•
•
Define a list of Graffiti abbreviations.
Calibrate the screen on your SPT 1700 series terminal.
Configure your SPT 1700 series terminal for use with a network, including
Spectrum24 (SPT 174x only), CDPD (SPT 1733 only), and GSM (SPT 1734 only).
To open the Preferences screens:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon to open the Applications Launcher.
icon to display the last Preferences screen you used.
3. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner to select the Preferences screen you want
to view.
Buttons Preferences
The Buttons Preferences screen enables you to associate different applications with the
the To Do List application and often use the Expense application, you can assign the To Do
List button to start the Expense application.
Any changes you make in the Buttons Preferences screen become effective immediately;
you do not have to switch to a different screen or application.
If you assign a different application to a button, you can still access the original application
using the Applications Launcher. Refer to Applications on page 3-3.
14-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
To change the Buttons Preferences:
1. On the General Preferences screen choose Buttons from the pick list. This displays
a list of all the applications installed on your SPT 1700 terminal.
Tap arrow to
show pick list
2. Tap the pick list next to the application you want to re-assign a button.
3. Select the new button.
Note:To restore all of the buttons to their factory settings, tap the Default
button.
14-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Preferences
Pen Preferences
The Buttons Preferences screen enables you to change the Button assignment of the full-
screen pen stroke. By default, the full-screen pen stroke activates the Graffiti Help screen.
Drag to top of screen
To change the Pen preferences:
1. Tap the Pen button in the Buttons Preferences screen to open the Pen screen.
2. Tap the pick list and select one of the following settings for the full-screen pen
stroke:
Backlight
Activates the backlight feature of the SPT 1700 terminal. You can
use this setting instead of the power button to turn the backlight on
and off.
Keyboard
Activates the on-screen keyboard for entering text characters.
14-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Graffiti Help
Activates a series of screens that show the complete Graffiti pen
stroke character set.
Turn Off & Lock Turns off and locks the SPT 1700 terminal. You must assign a
password to lock the SPT 1700 terminal. When locked, you need to
enter the password to unlock and use your SPT 1700 terminal.
Beam Data
Beams the current entry to another terminal.
3. Tap the OK button to complete your selection and return to the Buttons Preferences
screen.
HotSync Buttons Preferences
The Buttons Preferences screen also enables you to associate different applications with
the HotSync button on the CRD1700-1000S. Any changes that you make in the HotSync
Buttons screen are effective immediately; you do not have to change to a different screen
or application.
To change the HotSync Buttons preferences:
1. Tap the HotSync button in the Buttons Preferences screen to open the HotSync
Buttons screen.
2. Tap the pick list next to the button you want to assign to display a list of all the
applications installed on your SPT 1700 terminal.
Tap arrow to
show pick list
3. Tap the application that you want to assign to each button. The default setting for
each button is the HotSync setting, which means the cradle and optional device
accessory perform their normal HotSync functions.
14-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Preferences
Connection Preferences
The Connection Preferences screen enables you to define the settings for the serial,
modem, and IR communications.
To define the Connection Preferences:
1. Tap the
icon to display the last Preferences screen you used.
2. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner and select Connection. The following
screen displays:
3. Tap the modem you want to configure and tap New for a new configuration, or Edit
to re-configure an existing one. The Edit screen displays:
14-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Name
If the configuration is new, enter the name of the modem connected
to the SPT 1700 terminal using the onscreen keyboard. If it is an
existing configuration, the modem name displays.
Connection
Method
The preferred method of communication.
Note: The SPT 1733 terminal can connect via Merlin to PC.
Dialing
Select either Touch Tone or Rotary. Select Rotary only if you are
certain that your telephone service does not support Touch Tone
dialing.
Volume
Speaker volume for the modem.
Note: The Dialing and Volume settings are not configurable for all
Connection Methods and may not display your screen.
4. Tap the Details button. The following screen displays:
5. Tap the Speed pick list and select the speed for communication.
6. Tap the Flow Ctl (Flow Control) pick list and select either Automatic, On or Off Flow
Control for the modem connection.
7. If necessary, edit the Init String text to change the modem setup string.
14-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Preferences
Digitizer Preferences
The Digitizer Preferences screen activates the digitizer calibration screen. This is the same
screen that displays when you start your SPT 1700 terminal for the first time. A complete
description of how to use the digitizer calibration screen can be found in Calibrating the
Screen on page 1-17.
Formats Preferences
Use the Formats Preferences screen to set the display format of the country, dates, times
and numbers on your SPT 1700 terminal.
Country Default
The country default sets date, time, week start day, and number conventions based on
geographic regions where you might use your SPT 1700 terminal. For example, in the
United Kingdom, time often is expressed based on a 24-hour clock. In the United States it
is based on a 12-hour clock with an AM or PM suffix.
All your SPT 1700 terminal applications use the Country default settings. You can, however,
customize your own preferences as described in Time, Date, Week Start and Numbers
Formats on page 14-10.
To set the country default:
1. In the Formats Preferences screen, tap the Preset To pick list. The following screen
displays:
2. Tap the country you want to use.
14-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Time, Date, Week Start and Numbers Formats
These settings define the defaults. Note that the format that you select appears in all
applications on your SPT 1700 terminal.
To select the Time, Date, Week start and Numbers format:
1. Tap the Time pick list in the Formats Preferences screen, and select the format that
you want for your SPT 1700 terminal.
2. Tap the Date pick list and select the format that you want for your SPT 1700
terminal.
3. Tap the Week starts pick list and select whether you want the first day of the week
to be either Sunday or Monday.
4. Tap the Numbers pick list and select the format that you want for your SPT 1700
terminal.
Note:This setting controls the Day, Week and Month views in the Date
Book application and all other aspects of your SPT 1700 terminal
that display a calendar.
General Preferences
The General Preferences screen is where you set the time, date, auto shut-off interval and
sounds for your SPT 1700 terminal.
Setting the Current Time
Use the Set Time button in the General Preferences screen to set the current time for your
SPT 1700 terminal.
14-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Preferences
To set the current time:
1. Tap the time in the General Preferences screen to open the Set Time screen.
Tap here
2. Tap the up or down arrows to change the number for the hour.
3. Tap the minutes numbers, and then tap the arrows to adjust the settings for the
current time.
4. Tap the AM or PM box to select the time of day.
Note:Your SPT 1700 terminal can also display time based on a 24-hour
clock. Refer to the Formats Preferences on page 14-9.
5. Tap the OK button to close the Set Time screen and return to the General
Preferences screen.
Setting the Current Date
Use the Set Date button in the General Preferences screen to set the current date for your
SPT 1700 terminal.
To set the current date:
1. Tap the date in the General Preferences screen to open the Set Date screen.
14-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
2. Tap the arrows at the top to select the current year.
Tap arrows to select year
Tap to select month
Tap to select date
3. Tap a month box to select the current month.
4. Tap the current date to set the date, close the Set Date screen and return to the
General Preferences screen.
Auto-Off
Your SPT 1700 terminal has an automatic shutoff feature that turns off the power and
backlight after a period of inactivity. This feature helps conserve battery power in case you
forget to turn off your SPT 1700 terminal.
If you find that your SPT 1700 terminal shuts itself off before you finish reviewing the
information on the screen, increase the time setting of the automatic shutoff feature.
To set the Auto-off delay:
1. Tap Auto-off After in the General Preferences screen to open the pick list.
2. Tap the setting you want to use for the automatic shutoff feature. You can choose
a delay of 1 minute, 2 minutes or 3 minutes.
Stay On In Cradle
This option is used to control whether the SPT 1700 terminal stays powered on while it is
in the cradle. To force the terminal to stay on while it is seated in the cradle, check this box.
Trigger Wake
Your SPT 1700 terminal can be “awakened” or powered on by pressing any one of the
scanner buttons. If you want this feature enabled, tap the Trigger Wake pick list and select
the “On” option. If you set this option to “Off”, the scanner buttons will not awaken the
terminal.
14-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Preferences
Overall, System, Alarm and Game Sounds
Your SPT 1700 terminal uses a variety of sounds. The Overall, System, Alarm and Game
Sound settings enable you to turn the sounds on or off, and to adjust the volume level.
To set the overall, system, alarm and game sounds, tap each option’s pick list and select
the sound level:
Note:When you turn off the System Sounds, you also turn off the “chime”
tones associated with the HotSync operation. The Game Sound
setting works only with games that are programmed to respond to
this setting. Older games typically do not respond to this setting.
Beam Receive
The Beam Receive preference controls the IRDA receiving. Refer to Beaming Information
to Other SPT 1700 Terminals on page 3-30 for details.
Network Preferences and Symbol Palm Terminal
Desktop TCP/IP Software
The Network Preferences settings enable you to use the TCP/IP software that comes with
Internet Service Providers (ISPs) or dial-in (remote access) servers. Because the TCP/IP
software is a feature of the operating system, you configure all parameters relating to it from
the Preferences application.
Note:For specific instructions on configuring your terminal for use with a
Spectrum24, CDPD, or GSM network refer to Chapter 2, Network
Setup.
To use the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop TCP/IP, you must configure both the Connection
Preferences and the Network Preferences settings.
14-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Note:Connection preferences settings enable your SPT 1700 terminal to
use an external modem (such as the SPT 1700 Modem Cradle) to
communicate with remote devices. For example, you can
communicate with your computer if you are away on travel or your
ISP server. Refer to Connection Preferences on page 14-7 for a
complete explanation on how to configure modem parameters.
After you configure both the Network and Connection (modem) Preferences, you can
establish a PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol), SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol) or CSLIP
(Compressed Serial Line Internet Protocol) connection with your ISP or dial-in server, by
using menu commands from the Network Preferences screen or by using a third-party
application.
Note:Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop TCP/IP provides the ability to
connect to your ISP or dial-in server, however, it does not come with
any applications to view the transmitted data. Visit the Symbol
website (http://www.symbol.com/palm) for information on third-party
applications that take advantage of TCP/IP.
Selecting a Service
Use the Service setting to choose the service template for your WAN, Internet Service
Provider or a dial-in server. Service templates are a set of ISP and dial-in server
configuration settings that you can create, save and reuse.
14-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Preferences
To select a service:
1. Tap the Service pick list in the Network Preference screen to display a list of all the
predefined service templates.
Tap here to display a list
of service templates
2. Tap the service you want to use.
Entering a User Name
The User Name setting identifies the name you use when you log into your Internet Service
Provider or your dial-in server. Although this field can contain multiple lines of text, only two
lines display on the screen.
To enter a user name:
1. Tap the User Name line in the Network Preferences screen to move the cursor to
that field. (If you select the Spectrum24 option it does not request a user name.)
2. Enter your user name.
Note:Most dial-in servers do not accept spaces in the user name.
Entering a Password
The Password field identifies the password you use to log into your server or ISP. Your entry
in this field determines whether your SPT 1700 terminal prompts you to enter a password
each time you log into your network.
If you do not enter a password, your SPT 1700 terminal displays the word “Prompt” in this
field and asks you to enter a password during the login procedure. If you enter a password,
14-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
your SPT 1700 terminal displays the word “Assigned” in this field and does not prompt you
to enter a password during the login procedure.
Note:If you are concerned about security, select the Prompt option and do
not enter a password.To enter a password:
1. Tap the Password box in the Network Preferences screen to open the Password
screen.
Enter password here
Tap here
2. Enter the password you use to log into your server.
3. Tap OK to confirm your entry and return to the Network Preferences screen.
Note:The Password field updates to display the word “Assigned.”
Adding Connection Settings
Use the Connection pick list to choose your modem.
When you select the Phone field, your SPT 1700 terminal opens a screen where you define
the telephone number you use to connect with your ISP or dial-in server. In addition, use
this screen to define a prefix, disable Call Waiting and give special instructions for using a
calling card.
Note:The phone setup screen works correctly for AT&T and Sprint long-
distance services. However, MCI customers need to put the calling
card number in the Phone field and the phone number in the Calling
Card field.
14-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Preferences
To enter your server phone number:
1. Tap the Phone field to open the Phone Setup screen.
Enter your ISP
phone number here
2. Enter the phone number you use to reach your ISP or dial-in server.
Entering a Prefix
A prefix is a number that you dial before the telephone number to access an outside line.
For example, many offices require that you dial “9” to dial a number outside the building.
To enter a prefix:
1. Select the Dial Prefix check box to activate this feature.
Select this box
if you need to
use a prefix
Enter your
prefix here
2. Enter the prefix you need on the Prefix line.
3. Tap OK to confirm your selection and return to the Network Preferences screen.
14-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Disabling Call Waiting
Call Waiting can cause your session to terminate if you receive a call while you are
connected. If your telephone has Call Waiting, disable this feature before logging into your
ISP or dial-in server.
To disable Call Waiting:
1. Select the Disable call waiting check box to activate this feature.
Enter your disable
code here
Select this box
if you need to
disable Call
Waiting
2. Enter the code to disable Call Waiting on the Disable call waiting line.
Note:Each telephone company assigns a code to disable Call Waiting.
Contact your local telephone company for the code that is
appropriate for you.
Using a Calling Card
The Use Calling Card field enables you to use your calling card when dialing your ISP or
Intranet server. There is usually a delay before you enter your calling card number. When
you define your calling card number, add commas at the beginning to compensate for this
delay. Each comma delays transmission of your calling card number for two seconds.
14-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Preferences
To use a calling card:
1. Select the Use Calling Card check box to activate this feature.
Select this box to
use a calling card
Enter your
calling card
number here
2. Enter your calling card number on the Use Calling Card line.
Note:It’s a good idea to add at least three commas at the beginning of your
calling card number to compensate for the cue delay.
3. Tap OK to confirm your selection and return to the Network Preferences screen.
Connecting to Your Service
After you set your Modem and Network Preferences, establishing a connection to your ISP
or dial-in server is easy.
Remember that you need a third-party application, such as a web browser or news reader,
to take advantage of this connection. Check the Symbol website (http://www.symbol.com/
palm) for the latest information about third-party applications that support SPT TCP/IP.
To establish a connection, tap the Connect button in the Network Preferences screen to dial
the current service and display the Service Connection Progress messages.
Tip: To see expanded Service Connection Progress messages, press the lower
half of the scroll button.
To close a connection, tap the Disconnect button in the Network Preferences screen to
terminate the connection between your SPT 1700 terminal and your service.
14-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Creating Additional Service Templates
You can create additional service templates from scratch or by duplicating existing
templates and editing information. After you create a new or duplicate template, you can
add and edit settings.
To add a new service template:
1. Tap the
icon in the Network Preferences screen to open the menus.
2. Tap New from the Service menu to create a new service template (called Untitled)
to the Service pick list and display it in the Network Preferences screen.
To duplicate an existing service template:
1. Tap the Service pick list in the Network Preference screen to open a list of all the
predefined service templates.
2. Tap the service you want to duplicate.
3. Tap the
icon to open the Network Preferences menus.
4. Tap Duplicate from the Service menu to add a copy of the service template to the
Service pick list and display it in the Network Preferences screen.
Adding Detailed Information to a Service Template
If you are using one of the predefined service templates, you will probably only need to
enter your user name and telephone number. If you are creating a new Service Templates,
you may need to provide additional information to your ISP or dial-in server. Use the Details
screen to add additional information to a selected service template.
14-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Preferences
To select a connection type:
1. Tap the service you want to use in the Network Preferences screen.
2. Tap the Details button to open the Details screen.
Select connection type
3. Tap the Connection type pick list and select one of the following connection types:
PPP
Point-to-Point protocol
SLIP
Serial Line Internet Protocol
CSLIP Compressed Serial Line Internet Protocol
Note:If you are not sure, try PPP; if that doesn’t work, ask your Internet
Service Provider or your System Administrator for the correct
connection type.
Idle Timeout
The Idle Timeout setting defines how long your SPT 1700 terminal waits before dropping
the connection with your ISP or dial-in server when you switch out of a TCP/IP application.
To set the Idle Timeout:
1. Tap the Idle Timeout pick list and select one of the following options:
Immediate
1 minute
Your SPT 1700 terminal drops the connection to your ISP
immediately when you switch to another application.
Your SPT 1700 terminal waits one minute for you to open
another application before it drops the connection.
14-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
2 minutes
3 minutes
Power Off
Your SPT 1700 terminal waits two minutes for you to open
another application before it drops the connection.
Your SPT 1700 terminal waits three minutes for you to open
another application before it drops the connection.
Your SPT 1700 terminal keeps your PPP or SLIP connection
until you power off your SPT 1700 terminal (or until it times out).
This option works best with the PalmPilot Modem.
2. Tap the OK button to confirm your selection and return to the Network Preferences
screen.
Defining Primary and Secondary DNS
The Domain Naming System (DNS) is a mechanism in the Internet for translating names
of host computers into IP addresses. When you enter a DNS number (or IP address), you
are identifying a specific server that handles the translation services.
Each IP address has four sections, separated by periods. In the Details screen, enter each
section separately. Each section of an IP address is made up of a number from 0 to 255;
numbers are the only allowable characters in this field.
Note:Ask your Internet Service Provider or System Administrator for the
correct Primary or Secondary DNS IP numbers.
Tip: Many systems do not require that you enter a DNS. If you are not sure, leave
the DNS field blank. Note that if your ISP or dial-in server requires a DNS number
and you did not enter that information in the Network Preferences screen, it will
appear that you successfully logged into your network. However, when you try to
use an application or look up information, the connection fails. If this occurs, try
adding a DNS number. Ask your ISP or your System Administrator for the correct
Primary and Secondary DNS IP numbers.
To enter a primary and secondary DNS:
1. Make sure the Query DNS check box is not selected.
Note:If the Query DNS check box is selected, it queries the connection
(modem) for the saved DNS information.
14-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Preferences
2. Tap the space to the left of the first period in the Primary DNS field, then enter the
first section of the IP address.
Note:Each section must be a number from 0 to 255.
3. Tap the second section of the Primary DNS field, then enter the second section of
the IP address, and so on until the sections are completed.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the Secondary DNS number.
5. Tap the OK button to confirm your selection and return to the Network Preferences
screen.
IP Address
Everyone who logs on to the Internet needs to have a unique identifier (an IP address),
whether permanent or temporary. Some networks dynamically assign a temporary IP
address when clients log in. The IP Address field lets you identify whether your network
provides automatic (dynamic) temporary IP addressing.
Note:If your IP address is permanently assigned, you will need to get that
information from your System Administrator. If you are not sure,
select Automatic.
To identify dynamic IP addressing, select the IP Address check box to activate this option.
Tap to have the
IP address
automatically
assigned
14-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
To enter a permanent IP address:
1. Clear the IP Address check box to disable this option and display a permanent IP
address field below the check box.
Enter the IP address here
2. Tap the space to the left of the first period then enter the first section of the IP
address.
Note:Each section must be a number from 0 to 255.
3. Tap and enter the remaining sections of the IP address.
4. Tap the OK button to confirm your selection and return to the Network Preferences
screen.
Creating a Login Script
A login script is a series of commands, similar to an autoexec.bat file, that automates
logging into your ISP. You can create login script files by selecting commands from the
Command pick list in the Login Script screen. Some of these commands, such as Send,
require you to supply additional information and have a parameter field for the necessary
data.
Note:You can also use non-ASCII and literal characters in your login
script. Refer to Appendix B, Non-ASCII Characters for Login Scripts
for additional information.
14-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Preferences
To create a login script:
1. Tap the Script button in the Details screen to open the Login Script screen.
2. Tap the End pick list to open the Command list.
3. Tap the command(s) you want from the Command list.
4. If the command requires additional information, a field displays to the right of it for
you to enter the information. The following commands are available:
Wait For
Tells your SPT 1700 terminal to wait for specific characters from the
TCP/IP server before executing the next command.
Wait For
Prompt
Tells your SPT 1700 terminal to wait for a prompt before executing the
next command.
Send
Transmits specific characters to the TCP/IP server to which you are
connecting.
Send CR
Transmits a carriage return or LF character to the TCP/IP server to
which you are connecting.
Send User ID Transmits the User ID information entered in the User ID field of the
Network Preferences screen.
Send
Password
Transmits the Password entered in the Password field of the Network
Preferences screen. If you did not enter a password in the Password
field, this command prompts you to enter one. The Password
command is usually followed by a Send CR command.
Delay
Tells your SPT 1700 terminal to wait a specific number of seconds
before executing the next command in the login script.
14-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Get IP
Prompt
End
Reads an IP address and uses it as the IP address for your SPT 1700
terminal. This command is used with SLIP connections.
Opens a screen and prompts you to enter text of some kind (for
example, a password or a security code).
Identifies the last line in the login script.
5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the login script is complete.
6. Tap OK to confirm your selection and return to the Details screen.
Deleting a Service Template
To delete a service template:
1. Tap the Service pick list in the Network Preference screen to open a list of available
service templates.
2. Tap the service you want to delete.
3. Tap the
icon to open the menus for the Network Preferences screen.
4. Tap Delete from the Service menu to display the Delete Service alert.
5. Tap the OK button to confirm that you want to delete the service template.
14-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Preferences
Network Preferences Menu Commands
The Network Preferences screen includes menu commands to make it fast and easy to
create and edit service templates. This section explains the menu commands that are
specific to the SPT TCP/IP application.
Refer to Using Menus on page 3-20 for information about menu commands that are
common to all of your SPT 1700 terminal applications.
Service Menu
When you select the Service menu, its commands display on screen.
New
Creates a new (empty) service template and adds it to the
Service pick list.
Delete
Deletes a selected service template from the Service pick list.
Duplicate
Copies the selected service template and adds it to the Service
pick list.
Options Menu
When you select the Options menu, its command displays on screen:
View Log
Displays the Network Log screen.
14-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
TCP/IP Troubleshooting
If you are having a problem establishing a network connection using the Desktop TCP/IP,
check this section and try the suggestions listed.
Displaying Expanded Service Connection Progress Messages
It’s helpful to identify at what point in the login procedure the connection fails. An easy way
to do this is to display the expanded Service Connection Progress messages, which
describe the current stage of the login procedure.
To display the expanded Service Connection Progress messages:
1. From the Network Preferences screen, tap Connect.
2. During login, press the lower half of the scroll button to display the messages.
Viewing the Network Log
If viewing the expanded Service Connection Progress messages does not give you enough
information to find out why you cannot connect to your ISP or dial-in server, look at the
Network Log. The Network Log lists all communication that occurs between your modem
and your dial-in server during the login procedure. The information in the Network Log can
help your ISP or your System Administrator pinpoint where the login procedure
communication fails and why.
To view the Network Log:
1. From the Network Preferences screen, tap View Log from the Options menu to
display the Network Log screen.
2. Tap the up and down arrows of the scroll bar to see the entire Network Log.
3. After you finish, tap the Done button to return to the Network Preferences screen.
Owner Preferences
The Owner Preferences screen enables you to record a name, company name, phone
number or any other information that you want associated with your SPT 1700 terminal.
If you use the Security application to turn off and lock your SPT 1700 terminal with a
password, information that you put in the Owner Preferences displays the next time you
turn on your SPT 1700 terminal. Refer to Chapter 15, Applications: Security for more
information.
14-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Preferences
To personalize your SPT1700 terminal:
1. Tap the Applications icon, followed by the Prefs icon.
2. Select Owner from the Preferences pick list.
Enter the text that you want to associate with your SPT 1700 terminal in the Owner
Preferences screen. If you enter more text than will fit on one screen, a scroll bar
automatically displays on the right side of the screen.
If you assign a Password (with the Security application), the information in the Owner
Preferences screen “locks” and cannot be changed. In this case, an Unlock button displays
at the bottom of the screen.
To unlock the Owner Preferences screen:
1. Tap the Unlock button in the Owner Preferences screen. The Unlock Message
screen displays.
button.
ShortCuts Preferences
The ShortCuts Preferences screen enables you to define abbreviations for entering text
with Graffiti. This section describes how to create, edit and delete a shortcut. For details on
the use of ShortCuts, refer to the Graffiti ShortCuts on page 3-16.
Creating a ShortCut
You can create a ShortCut for any words, letters or numbers. All ShortCuts you create
display on the list in the ShortCut Preferences screen. All the ShortCuts are available in any
14-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
of your SPT 1700 terminal applications and are backed up on your computer when you
perform a HotSync operation.
To create a ShortCut:
1. In the General Preferences screen tap, tap Shortcuts in the pick list and tap New
to open the ShortCut Entry screen.
Tap New
2. On the ShortCut name line, enter the letters you want to use to activate the
ShortCut.
3. Tap the ShortCut Text area and enter the text that you want to appear when you
write the ShortCut characters.
Tip: You may want to add a space (space character) after the last word in your
ShortCut text. This way, a space automatically follows the ShortCut text.
4. Tap the OK button to close the ShortCut Entry screen and define your ShortCut.
Tip: To use a ShortCut, draw the ShortCut stroke followed by the ShortCut
characters. When you draw the ShortCut stroke, the ShortCut symbol appears at
the insertion point to show that you are in ShortCut mode.
ShortCut
14-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Preferences
Editing a ShortCut
After you create a ShortCut, you can modify it at any time.
To edit a ShortCut:
1. Tap the ShortCut you want to edit in the ShortCuts Preferences screen.
2. Tap the Edit button to display the ShortCut Name and ShortCut text in the ShortCut
Entry screen.
3. Make the changes you want and tap the OK button.
Deleting a ShortCut
If you no longer need a ShortCut, you can delete it from the list of ShortCuts.
To delete a ShortCut:
1. Tap the ShortCut you want to delete in the ShortCuts Preferences screen.
2. Tap the Delete button to display an alert screen.
3. Tap the Yes button to confirm that you want to delete the ShortCut.
14-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
14-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Assigning a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Hiding Private Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Showing Private Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Masking Private Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Locking Your SPT 1700 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Changing or Deleting a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Recovering from a Lost Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
15-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
15-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Security
Introduction
Your SPT 1700 terminal comes with a Security application so that unauthorized users
cannot view the entries you wish to protect.
With the Security application you can:
•
Hide record entries you mark as “Private.” You can hide private entries with or
without a password. Without a password, private entries are hidden until you set
the Security application to show them. With a password, you must enter the
password to view the private entries.
•
Turn off and lock your SPT 1700 terminal so that it does not operate until you enter
the correct password.
To open the Security application:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon to open the Applications Launcher.
icon to display the Security screen.
Assigning a Password
You can assign a password to protect your private entries and to lock your SPT 1700
terminal.
To assign a password:
1. Select the Security icon, then tap the Password box to open the Password screen.
Tap here
2. Enter the password that you want for your SPT 1700 terminal.
3. Tap the OK button to open a confirmation screen.
15-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
4. Enter the same password a second time, and tap the OK button to assign that
password to your SPT 1700 terminal.
Hiding Private Entries
You can hide the entries that you mark as private. When hidden, they are not visible
anywhere in the list. If you assign a password, you must enter it to show entries you mark
as private. Note that your SPT 1700 terminal merely hides the entries; it does not delete
them.
To hide Private entries:
1. Select Hide Records from the Current Privacy pick list. The Hide Records screen
displays:
Tap here
and select
Hide
2. Tap Hide to hide entries you mark Private and to close the Hide Records screen.
Showing Private Entries
After you hide Private entries, you can use the Security application to display them again.
15-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Security
To show Private entries:
1. Select Hide Records from the Current Privacy pick list. If you did not assign a
password, your Private entries should be visible. If you assigned a password, the
Show Private Records screen displays:
2. Enter your password.
3. Tap the Show box to close the Show Private Records screen and display Private
entries in your SPT 1700 terminal applications.
Masking Private Entries
When a private record is masked, a visual placeholder appears where a record would
normally be displayed.
To mask private entries:
1. Ensure that the record or records you want to mask are defined as Private. To
make a record private, select the record, tap Edit, Details, and then Private.
2. Select the Security icon.
3. Tap Mask Records from the Current Privacy pick list.
Return to the application. Messages marked as Private are masked with a gray bar.
15-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Locking Your SPT 1700 Terminal
operate it.
Important: If you lock your SPT 1700 terminal as described in the following procedure, you
need to enter the exact password to re-activate your SPT 1700 terminal. If you forget the
password, you must perform a hard reset to resume using your SPT 1700 terminal. Using
the reset button deletes all the entries in your SPT 1700 terminal; however, you can restore
all synchronized data at the next HotSync operation. For information about how to use the
reset button, Performing a Hard Reset on page 21-5.
To lock your SPT 1700 terminal with a password:
1. Use the HotSync application to synchronize the data between your SPT 1700
terminal and your computer. Refer to Chapter 9, Applications: HotSync® for
information about how to use the HotSync application.
2. Assign a password as described in Assigning a Password on page 15-3.
3. Tap the Lock & Turn Off button in the Security screen to open the System Lockout
screen.
Tap here
4. Tap the Off & Lock button to turn off the power for your SPT 1700 terminal.
5. Start your SPT 1700 terminal and enter the password.
15-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Security
Changing or Deleting a Password
Once you define a password for your SPT 1700 terminal, you can change or delete it at any
time. You must enter the current password before you can change or delete it.
To change or delete your password:
1. Tap the Assigned box in the Security screen to open the Password screen.
Tap here
2. Enter the current password.
3. Tap the OK button to open a screen that prompts you for a new password.
4. To change the password, enter the new password and tap the OK button. To delete
the password, tap the Delete button.
15-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Recovering from a Lost Password
If the Off & Lock option is not active and you forget or lose your password, you can delete
the password from your SPT 1700 terminal. Deleting a lost password also deletes all
entries and files marked as Private.
Important: If you synchronize with your computer before deleting a lost password, your
SPT 1700 terminal restores your private entries the next time you perform a HotSync
operation, but it does not restore the password.
To delete a lost password:
1. Tap the Lost Password button in the Security screen to open the Delete Password
dialog.
2. Tap the Yes button to delete the password, as well as all records and entries
marked “Private.”
15-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Opening the To Do List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Working With To Do Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Setting Priority (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Checking Off a To Do Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
To Do Item Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Choosing a To Do Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Setting a Due Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Marking a To Do Item Private. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Deleting a To Do Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
To Do Show Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
To Do List Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Record Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
16-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
16-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: To Do List
Introduction
The To Do List is a convenient place to create reminders and prioritize the activities that
you have to do.
With the To Do List, you can:
•
•
•
•
Make a quick and convenient list of things to do.
Assign a priority level to each task.
Assign a due date for any or all of your To Do items.
Assign a category for any, or all of your To Do items. You can then view your To Do
List based on category (Business, Personal, etc.).
•
•
Sort your To Do items by due date, priority level or category.
Attach notes to individual To Do items for a description or clarification of the task.
Opening the To Do List
Press the To Do List button on the front panel of the SPT 1700 terminal to display the To
Do List screen.
To Do List button
Tip: Press the To Do List button repeatedly to cycle through the categories in which
you have items.
16-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Working With To Do Items
A To Do item is a reminder of some task that you have to complete. Your SPT 1700 terminal
gives you control over the appearance, level of detail and the sort order of To Do items.
To create a To Do item:
1. Tap the New button in the To Do List screen.
New To
Do item
Tap New
2. Enter the text you want to appear in the To Do item. The text can be longer than
one line.
area automatically creates a new To Do item.
3. Tap anywhere on the screen to de-select the To Do item.
Note:You can add a name, address, and phone number to a To Do List
item using the Phone Lookup option. Refer to Using Phone Lookup
on page 4-4 for details.
Setting Priority (Optional)
Priority settings for To Do items enable you to arrange the tasks in your To Do List according
to relative levels of importance. The default setting for the To Do List arranges To Do items
by priority and due date, with priority 1 items at the top. If you have a number of To Do items
in your list, changing an item’s priority setting may move its position in the list.
16-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: To Do List
Note:When you create a new To Do item, its Priority is automatically set
a To Do item first, the new item displays beneath the selected item
with the same priority as the selected item.
To set a Priority level for a To Do item:
1. Tap the Priority number on the left side of the To Do item to open the Priority pick
list. (Refer to To Do Show Options on page 16-8 if priority numbers are not visible.)
Tap here
Tap to
select
priority
2. Tap the Priority number that you want to set for the To Do item (1 is most important
and 5 is least important).
Do Details screen described later in this chapter.
Checking Off a To Do Item
The To Do List makes it easy to mark tasks as you complete them. You can set the To Do
List to record the date that you complete the To Do item and you can choose to show or
hide complete To Do items. Refer to To Do Show Options on page 16-8.
To check off a To Do List item:
1. In the To Do List, select an entry and tap the Show button.
2. In the To Do Preferences screen, tap Show Completed Items.
16-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Note:If you clear this setting, your To Do items disappear from the list
when you complete (check) them. These items have not been
deleted, and still reside in the memory of your SPT 1700 terminal.
You must purge completed items to remove them from memory.
Refer to To Do Show Options on page -8 for details.
3. Tap the check box on the left side of the item.
Completed To
Do item
To Do Item Details
The To Do Item Details screen enables you to change individual To Do item settings.
To activate the To Do Item Details screen:
1. Tap anywhere on the text of a To Do item in the To Do List screen.
2. Tap the Details button to open the To Do Item Details screen.
The following sections describe the features and settings that are available in the To Do
Item Details screen.
16-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: To Do List
Choosing a To Do Category
Categories can help you file individual To Do items into groups for easy review. You can
assign and edit categories using the Categories pick list in the Details screen (refer to Using
Categories on page 3-24 for a complete description of categories).
Setting a Due Date
You can associate a due date with any To Do List item. You can also sort the items that
display in the list based on their due date.
To set a Due Date for a To Do List Item:
1. Tap the “No Date” text in the Details screen to open the Due Date pick list.
Tap here to view
the Due Date pick list
2. Tap the Due Date pick list to view potential due dates for the To Do item. The
following are available:
Today
Assigns the current date.
Tomorrow
One week later
No Date
Assigns tomorrow’s date.
Assigns the date exactly one week from the current date.
Removes the due date from the To Do item.
Choose date
Opens the Due Date screen where you can chose any due date
that you want for the To Do item.
3. Tap the OK button to confirm your selection and close the To Do Details screen.
Note:If you turn on the Show Due Dates option in the To Do Show options
screen, you can tap directly on the due date in the To Do List to open
the pick list shown in step 2.
16-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Marking a To Do Item Private
An item on your To Do List can be marked as Private by tapping the Private checkbox. Note
it can only be Private if Security is turned on.
Deleting a To Do Item
There are three ways to delete a To Do item: simply delete the text of the To Do item, use
the Menu Command (as described in Record Menu on page 16-10), or use the To Do
Details screen.
To delete a To Do item with the To Do Details screen:
1. Tap anywhere in the text area of the To Do item that you want to delete.
2. Tap the Details button to open the To Do Item Details screen.
3. Tap the Delete button to open the Delete To Do alert screen.
4. Tap the OK button to confirm that you want to delete the To Do item.
To Do Show Options
The Show Options screen enables you to control the appearance of the To Do List
application.
To change the Show Options settings:
1. Tap the Show button in the To Do List screen to open the To Do Preferences
screen.
16-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: To Do List
2. Select any of the following settings:
Sort by
Enables you to sort the To Do items in one of the following ways:
•
•
•
•
Priority, Due Date
Due Date, Priority
Category, Priority
Category, Due Date
Show
Completed
Items
Displays your complete To Do items in the To Do List. If you turn off
this setting, your To Do items disappear from the list when you
complete (check) them. They will remain in memory until they are
Purged (refer to Record Menu on page 16-10 for more information
about purging).
Show Only Due Shows only the To Do items that are currently due, past due or have
Items
no due date specified in the To Do List. When this setting is active,
To Do items that are not yet due do not display.
Record
Completion
Date
Replaces the due date with the actual completion date (when you
checked the item). If you do not assign a due date to an item, the
completion date still records when you complete the item.
Show Due Dates Displays the due dates associated with To Do items in the To Do List
screen, and displays an exclamation mark next to incomplete To Do
items after the due date passes.
Show Priorities Shows the priority numbers for the To Do items in the To Do List
screen.
Show
Categories
Shows the category for each To Do item on the far right of the To Do
List screen.
3. Tap the OK button to confirm your selections and close the screen.
16-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
To Do List Menu Commands
The To Do List includes menu commands to perform common file and editing tasks. Refer
to Using Menus on page 3-20 for information about menu commands that are common to
all SPT 1700 terminal applications.
Record Menu
When you select the Record menu, its commands display on screen.
Delete Item
Opens an alert screen, prompting you to confirm that you want to delete
the current To Do item. You must select a To Do item before you can
delete it. Tap the OK button to delete the To Do item from your SPT
1700 terminal, or tap the Cancel button to close the alert screen and
keep the To Do item.
Note: By default your SPT 1700 terminal removes the item from the To
Do list, but retains a copy of the item and transfers it to an archive file
on your computer the next time you perform a HotSync operation. To
remove the event completely, clear the Save archive copy on PC check
box.
Attach Note
Delete Note
Opens the To Do Note screen where you can create a note for the
current To Do item.
Opens an alert screen, prompting you to confirm that you really want to
delete the note attached to the To Do item. You must select a To Do item
before you can delete its note. Tap the Yes button to delete the Note
from the memory of your SPT 1700 terminal, or tap the No button to
close the alert screen and return to the To Do List.
16-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: To Do List
Purge
Deletes To Do items that you mark (check) as complete. All complete
To Do List items remain in the To Do List until you use this command.
The default setting is “Save archive copy on PC.” This removes
complete To Do items from the To Do List, but retains copies and
transfers them to an archive file on your computer the next time you
perform a HotSync operation.
Beam Item
Beams the current To Do item to another SPT 1700 terminal through
the IR port.
Beam Category Beams all To Do Items in the current category to another SPT 1700
terminal through the IR port.
Options Menu
When you select the Options menu, its commands displays on screen.
Font
Displays the Select Font screen where you can choose a different font
(text) style for your Address Book entries. Refer to Choosing Fonts on
page 3-23 for details.
Phone Lookup Activates the Phone Lookup feature, which is described in Using
Phone Lookup on page 4-4.
Security
Allows you to change the Security on a To Do List item. You can hide,
show, or mask an item. Refer to Chapter 15, Applications: Security for
details.
About To Do
List
Shows version (revision) information for the To Do List application.
16-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
16-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 17
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Scanning with the SPT 1700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
SScan Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
SScan Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Demo Scan Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Demo Scan Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Scanning 1-D Bar Codes Using Demo Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Barcode Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Scanning 2-Dimensional Bar Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
Scanning Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
Battery Implications While Using the Laser Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
17-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
17-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Laser Scanner
Introduction
The SPT 1700 has an integrated scanner which allows you to collect data by scanning bar
codes, provided you have a scanning application loaded on your terminal. The laser is
emitted from the top of the unit.
Scanning with the SPT 1700
Included on the Symbol Palm Terminal Utility CD are two demonstration programs: SScan
and Demo Scan. These programs are designed to assist the applications developer in
writing an application for the scanner. Source code for these programs is located in the
Samples subdirectory of the Scanner SDK directory, and the prc files are located in the prc
subdirectory of the Scanner SDK directory. If your terminal does not contain these
demonstration programs, contact your distributor.
To add SScan.prc or ScanDemo.prc to the SPT 1700, use the SPT Install Tool to designate
the files to be added to the SPT 1700 during the next HotSync.
SScan Application
The SScan application is a basic scanning application. To scan bar codes with the SPT
1700 using SScan:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon to open the Applications Launcher.
icon to open SScan.
3. Aim the terminal at the bar code.
4. Tap the Scan button, or use the left or right trigger to activate the scan beam.
The scan LED lights and the laser beam is emitted from the top of the terminal. Make sure
the beam covers the entire bar code. A successful decode is indicated by a green LED and
a beep. The bar code data is displayed on the screen. In the Bar Type field, the type of
symbology (e.g., Code 39) is displayed. In the Bar Data field, the actual collected bar code
data displays.
SScan Menu Commands
Tap the
icon to display the available menu.
17-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Options Menu
When you select the Options menu, its commands display on screen:
Reset Defaults
About
Allows you to reset the default values.
Provides version information.
Demo Scan Application
The Demo Scan application allows you to customize your scanner’s features and scan bar
codes.
To open the Demo Scan application:
1. Tap the
2. Tap the
icon to open the Applications Launcher.
icon to open Demo Scan.
The Symbol Scanner Demo screen displays:
17-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Laser Scanner
Available Symbologies
Scan Enable
Allows you to select the symbologies to be
recognized by the scanner by tapping on the
box next to the name of the desired
symbology. When selected, the box has a
check mark.
When this option is clicked, and the trigger is
pressed, the laser scanner beam activates.
The beam remains on for approximately 3
seconds. Alternatively, tapping on the Scan
button on the bottom of the screen performs
the same action.
LED
When this box is checked, the green LED
lights. This serves as a test of the LED. To
stop the LED test, tap the LED box again.
Trigger Mode
Level: only the SPT 1700 scan trigger initiates
the scan; the laser is turned off when the
trigger is released or the decode was
successful.
Pulse: only the SPT 1700 scan trigger initiates
the scan; the laser is turned off when
laser_on_time is reached or when the decode
was successful.
Host (default): The SPT 1700 scan trigger or
the application’s ScanCmdStartDecode
command initiates the scan; the laser is
turned off when the trigger is released, or
when laser_on_time is reached, the
ScanCmdStopDecode command is called, or
the decode was successful.
Bar Type
Bar Data
Once a bar code is decoded, displays the type
of the decoded bar codes (i.e., Code 39, Code
128, Code 93, etc.)
Once a bar code is decoded, displays the
decoded data.
17-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Demo Scan Menu Options
Tap the
icon to display the available menus.
Setup Menu
When you select the Setup menu, its commands display on screen:
Hardware Setting
Beep on Good Determines if the terminal beeps to indicate a successful decode.
Decode
Redundancy
Determines if the scanner uses redundancy.
Linear Security Defines the linear security level to be used by the scanner; level 1, 2,
3, or 4.
Scan Angle
Decode LED On Defines the length of time (in seconds) the decode LED remains on
Time when a symbol is decoded.
Defines the scan angle to be used by the scanner; narrow or wide.
Laser On Time Defines the length of time (in seconds) the laser beam remains on
when the trigger is pressed.
Aim Duration
Defines the length of time the laser pointer beam remains on when the
trigger is pressed or the scan button is tapped.
Code Setting
Code ID Char
Defines the CodeID Character. The options are None, AIM and
Symbol.
Tx Format
Defines the data transmission format.
Defines the Prefix and Suffix values.
Prefix/Suffix
Beep Menu
This menu option allows you to customize the Frequency, Duration and Pattern of the
scanner’s beep.
17-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Laser Scanner
Options Menu
When you select the Options menu, its commands display on screen:
Reset Defaults Allows you to reset the default values.
About
Provides version information.
Scanning 1-D Bar Codes Using Demo Scan
To scan 1-D bar codes:
1. Tap the
icon to open Demo Scan.
2. Customize your scanner’s features by selecting from the various options described
previously.
3. Aim the scanner at the bar code.
4. Press either the right, left or center scan trigger or tap the Scan Button. Make sure
the red scan beam covers the entire bar code. The green scan LED lights and a
beep sounds to indicate a successful decode.
Barcode Application
The Barcode application is a basic receiving application, which demonstrates the terminal’s
scanning and signature capture capabilities. To use Barcode:
1. Select the Barcode icon
from your main application screen.
17-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
The Receiving Demo Screen displays:
Item Code
Contains the data for an item code once it is
scanned. A one or two-dimensional bar code
can be scanned to fill this field.
Quantity
Location
This drop-down menu allows you to select the
appropriate quantity.
Contains the location data for a location bar
code once it is scanned. You can also use
Graffiti to enter the location data in this field.
Only one-dimensional bar codes can be used
to fill this field.
Please Sign Here
Sign your name here using the stylus.
To submit the collected data, tap the Submit option. When the submission is
complete, the fields clear and you can continue collecting data.
Scanning 2-Dimensional Bar Codes
Some models of the SPT 1700 perform 2-Dimensional bar code scanning. To scan a 2-
dimensional PDF417 bar code:
1. Aim the scanner at the PDF bar code and press the trigger.
2. Hold the trigger down and keep the scan line parallel to the rows of the symbol.
3. Manually raster the scan line by slowly moving the scanner up and down so it
scans the entire bar code at a rate of one inch per second.
17-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: Laser Scanner
When PDF Decode Feedback is enabled, a clicking noise lets you know the bar code is
being decoded. If this parameter is enabled but there’s no clicking noise when you’re
scanning the bar code, it’s not being scanned properly.
To improve PDF decoding:
•
•
Check that PDF417 scanning is enabled.
Make sure the scan line extends at least 1/2” past the left and right edges of the
bar code.
•
•
•
Hold the scanner closer for denser symbols, farther away for larger symbols.
Make sure you scan the top and bottom rows of the symbol.
Be patient - it may take several attempts to decode the symbol.
The bar code has been completely decoded when you hear a tone, followed by a short, high
tone beep. The green LED stays lit for two seconds or until the next trigger pull.
1/2”
1/2”
Scan Line
Scanning Problems
If the bar code is not being decoded, check the following:
•
•
•
Make sure the bar code label is not defaced.
Make sure the bar code is of a symbology which can be read by the scanner.
Check that the scanner window is not dirty. If it is, gently clean it using a tissue or
other non-abrasive material. Do not spray any cleaner directly on the scanner
window.
•
•
•
Try another bar code. It is possible that your bar code is bad.
Check your application code.
Make sure the parameters are set correctly for the bar code being scanned; i.e.,
lengths, symbology, etc.
If you do not hear a beep after a good decode, check that the system sound option is set
in the general preferences screen, and that Beep on Good Decode is set in the hardware
setup. Refer to Demo Scan Menu Options on page 17-6 for details.
17-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
If you have checked all of these things and are still experiencing problems decoding your
bar codes, please contact Symbol Technologies Technical Support Center. Refer to Symbol
Support Centers on page -xix for contact information.
Battery Implications While Using the Laser Scanner
If your battery becomes low while the scanning application is active, the scanning
application deactivates and you receive the message, “Battery Low Error”. The remaining
desktop applications continue to work until you receive further low battery warnings. You
should perform a HotSync at this point to avoid data loss. If you attempt to scan when your
battery is low, you receive the message, “Your battery level is too low for scanning”.
Recharge the battery and attempt scanning again.
17-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 18
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Using GsmDemo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Working with Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
GsmDemo Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
18-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
18-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: GsmDemo
Introduction
GsmDemo allows you to explore what features GSM and the SPT 1734 terminal offer you,
including sending and receiving SMS messages.
Using GsmDemo
The first step in using GsmDemo is to configure the SPT 1734 terminal to work with a
network.
To start GsmDemo:
1. Tap the
icon, then the
icon.
GsmDemo opens the internal serial port to the GSM modem and attempts to
register with a network.The following screen displays:
Status
There are three possibilities: Not registered,
Registered, and Registration failed.
Register
De-register
PIN
Tap to register with the network now.
Tap to end your network session.
Used for security reasons. If your SIM card
has this pin enabled, enter your pin number
here.
Remember PIN checkbox: Tap and your PIN
number will be remembered and will be used
every time the modem is registered.
18-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
On Exit
When exiting GsmDemo, you can:
Leave modem registered: Check this box if
you are going to use the 1734 terminal’s
HotSync feature. Refer to Configuring a GSM
WAN Connection (SPT 1734 Only) on page 2-
25 and Performing a GSM HotSync on page
9-21 for additional details.
Monitor text messages: GsmDemo will
notify you with a pop-up screen if you’ve
received any SMS text messages.
Note: this feature is only enabled when you
have exited the GsmDemo application.
Network
Signal
Displays the network you are registered with
(i.e., UK Vodaphone).
Displays signal strength.
18-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: GsmDemo
Working with Text Messages
GsmDemo allows you to send, receive, and view text messages with your SPT 1734
terminal.
Read SMS
To read your SMS messages:
1. Tap the main pick list and select Read SMS. The following screen displays:
Displays the sender’s
Displays the message text
phone number
Unread
2. Select a message from the list and tap the Read button to read a message.
3. Tap the OK button when you are done.
4. Select a message from the list and tap the Reply button to open the Send SMS
screen and reply to the message.
5. Tap the Delete button to delete a message.
18-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Send SMS
To send an SMS message:
1. Tap the main pick list and select Send SMS. The following screen displays:
Tap to access
the terminal’s
phone book
2. Enter the Phone number of the message recipient and the message.
3. If you do not know the phone number, tap the Phone book button to access the SPT
1734 terminal’s Address Book. The following screen displays:
Tap here to look up a
phone number
Note:The Phone Book only displays items with a last name and a mobile
phone number.
4. Tap Look Up to search for a phone number.
To find a phone number more quickly, enter the first letter of the name you want to
find in the Look Up line at the bottom of the screen. The list scrolls to the first name
that starts with that letter. You can continue to add letters to narrow your search.
5. Tap the Paste button to insert the phone number into the message on the Send
SMS screen.
18-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: GsmDemo
6. Tap the Send button to send the message.A successful message screen displays:
Data Call
The Data Call feature is used to test and ensure that the modem can send and receive calls.
Note:You must use the Graffiti writing area when entering information in
the Data Call screen.
To test the modem:
1. Select Data call from the main pick list. The Data Call screen displays:
The current activity
Clear screen
Dial
Clears any entered commands from the screen.
Calls another terminal or modem.
Disconnects the session.
Hangup
Action
Possible actions include Idle, Connected,
Hanging up, Hangup failed, or Hung up.
18-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
2. Tap the Dial button and the Enter Number screen displays:
3. Tap the Phone Book button to select a number from the SPT 1734 terminal’s phone
book, or enter the number and tap the Dial button.
Note:The Phone Book only displays items with a last name and a main
number for the Data Call screen.
Information
The information screen allows you to browse and switch to other networks, and also
provides diagnostic information about your modem type and driver version.
To view the Information screen:
1. Select Information from the main pick list. The Information screen displays:
18-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: GsmDemo
2. Tap the Browse button to browse available networks. The following warning
displays:
Note:If your modem is not registered you will not be able to browse
available networks.
3. Tap the Yes button to browse. The following screen displays while the terminal
searches for available networks:
4. The list of available networks displays.
18-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
5. Select the network you want to switch to and tap the Switch To button. If the
network you attempt to switch to is forbidden, the following error displays:
The Diagnostic information displays modem driver version, manufacturer, model,
revision, and serial number, depending upon the modem’s registration status.
18-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications: GsmDemo
GsmDemo Menu Commands
This section explains the menu commands specific to GsmDemo that make it fast and easy
to perform tasks.
Options Menu
The Options menu can be selected from all screens. When you select Options, its
commands display on the screen.
Tap to enter the Service Center phone number.
Set Service Centre
1. You may need to change the service centre phone number if it is missing, its phone
number has changed, or you wish to choose an alternate service center.
2. Tap Set Service Centre. The following screen appears:
Note:If your modem is not registered you will receive a “Modem not
registered” error and will be unable to proceed.
3. Enter the new Service Centre Number and click OK.
18-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Help Menu
The Help menu can be selected from all screens. When you select Help, its commands
display on the screen.
GsmDemo help
About
Opens the GsmDemo help screens.
Provides version information for GsmDemo.
18-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Installing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Installing Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
Removing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
Removing the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
19-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
19-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing and Removing Applications
Introduction
This chapter explains how to install and remove applications on your SPT 1700 terminal
and how to remove the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software from your computer.
Installing Applications
Your SPT 1700 terminal comes with the Date Book, Address Book, To Do List, Memo Pad,
Expense, Calculator and Mail applications installed and ready to use.
You can also install additional applications on your SPT 1700 terminal. The SPT Install Tool
makes it quick and easy to install software on your SPT 1700 terminal during a HotSync
operation.
Note:Any game or application that you install on your SPT 1700 terminal
resides in RAM memory. A hard reset on the SPT 1700 terminal
automatically deletes these applications; you can also delete them
manually.
To install software on your SPT 1700 terminal:
1. Copy the application you want to install into the Add-on subfolder in your SPT
folder on your computer.
Note:If you prefer to copy the application into another folder, navigate to
that folder before you complete step 5.
19-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
2. Double-click the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop icon on your Windows desktop (or
select Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop from the Start menu) to open the Symbol
Palm Terminal Desktop software.
3. Click the Install button to open the SPT Install Tool screen.
19-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing and Removing Applications
Tip: You can also access the Install Tool dialog by selecting Install Tool from the
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop program group or by double-clicking any file with
a prc file extension.
4. Select the user name that corresponds to your SPT 1700 terminal in the User drop-
down list.
5. Click the Add button to open the Open dialog.
6. Click the application(s) that you want to install on your SPT 1700 terminal.
7. Click the Open button to return to the Install Tool dialog.
19-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Note:Review the list of applications you selected in the Install Tool dialog.
If you do not want to install an application, click it, then click the
Remove button. (This does not remove the application from your
computer, it simply removes it from the list of applications to install.)
8. Perform a local HotSync operation to install the application(s) you selected. Refer
to Conducting a Local HotSync Operation on page 9-9 for details.
Installing Games
The CD-ROM that comes with your SPT 1700 terminal includes several games that you can
install with the SPT Install Tool. These games include:
•
•
•
•
•
HardBall
Puzzle
Giraffe
MineHunt
SubHunt.
Note:Giraffe is a fun, easy way for you to practice writing Graffiti.
After you install and start a game, the instructions display in the Game menu. Depending
on the game, the Game menu may also contain commands to show high scores, to start a
new game or to set Preferences for the game.
19-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing and Removing Applications
Removing Applications
If you run out of memory or decide that you no longer need an application you installed, you
can remove applications from your SPT 1700 terminal. You can remove only add-on
applications, patches and extensions that you install; you cannot remove the applications
that reside in the ROM portion of your SPT 1700 terminal, including Date Book, Address
Book, To Do List, Memo Pad, Expense, Calculator and Mail applications.
To remove an add-on application:
1. Tap the
Launcher.
2. Tap the
Launcher menus.
icon on the SPT 1700 terminal screen to open the Applications
icon on the SPT 1700 terminal screen to open the Applications
3. Tap Delete from the App menu to open the Delete screen.
4. Tap the application that you want to remove.
5. Tap the Delete button to display a confirmation message.
Note:If you change your mind and do not want to delete an application, do
not select an application and tap Done.
6. Tap the Yes button to indicate that you want to remove the application from your
SPT 1700 terminal.
7. Tap the Done button to close the Delete screen and return to the Applications
Launcher.
19-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Removing the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop
Software
If you no longer want to use the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software, you can remove
it from your computer.
To remove the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software:
1. Select Settings, then Control Panel from the Start menu to open the Windows
Control Panel.
2. Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon.
3. On the Install/Uninstall tab, select Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop from the list.
4. Click the Add/Remove button.
5. Click Yes to confirm that you want to remove the application.
19-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20
Getting Help With Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Displaying Online Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
SPT 1700 Diagnostics Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
System Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
Bar Code Scanner Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
Serial Port Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
Digitizer Alignment Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
System Diagnostics Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
Technical Support, Service and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-15
Technical Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-15
20-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
20-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Help With Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Introduction
There are several ways to get help with your SPT 1700 terminal. You can display online tips
on your SPT 1700 terminal and you can review the troubleshooting section in this chapter
and on your Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop Software CD. If you need additional
assistance, there are several ways to contact Symbol Technical Support. This chapter
provides details on each of these methods.
Displaying Online Tips
Many of the screens that display on your SPT 1700 terminal contain an online tips icon in
the upper-right corner. Online tips contain a summary of what is required by the screen,
shortcuts for using the screen or other useful information. Online tips always relate to the
function that you are currently performing with your SPT 1700 terminal.
To use the online tips:
1. Tap the
icon in the upper-right corner of a screen to open the Tips screen.
2. After you review the Tips screen, tap the Done button.
20-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
SPT 1700 Diagnostics Utility
The SPT 1700 Diagnostics Utility is used to ensure that your SPT 1700 Terminal is
operating properly. It can also assist you in troubleshooting problems you may encounter.
The Diagnostics Utility tests the various features of the terminal, and reports whether or not
they are operating properly.
To run the Diagnostics Utility, run the Diag Application, which displays on your Terminal’s
Main Application screen. The Main Diagnostics screen has five options:
•
•
•
•
•
System Information
Bar Code Scanner
Serial Port
Digitizer Alignment
System Diagnostics.
Tapping any of these options displays screens of related information.
20-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Help With Your SPT 1700 Terminal
System Information
The System Information option describes the system attributes of the terminal. Tapping this
option displays the System Information screen.
Manufacturer
RAM Size
The manufacturer of the terminal.
The amount of Random Access Memory.
RAM Free/Used
The amount of free and used Random Access
Memory.
ROM Used
The amount of free and used Read-Only
Memory.
Flash ID
User
The serial number assigned to the unit.
The username of the terminal.
Battery
The voltage level of the batteries.
20-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Bar Code Scanner Test
The Bar Code Scanner option tests the integrated scanner. Selecting the Bar Code
Scanner option displays the Bar Code Scanner Diagnostics Screen.
To test the scanner:
1. Select the Scanner Enabled checkbox.
2. Page down to the second page by pressing the down button on the terminal, or by
tapping on the arrow in the lower left corner of the screen with the stylus.
3. To ensure that a specific type of bar code can be read, select the bar code types
you would like to read and tap Done.
20-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Help With Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Serial Port Test
The Serial Port option tests the terminal’s serial port by sending a test message.
To run the serial port test:
1. Place your terminal in a cradle attached to a computer.
2. Determine which communications port is used by HotSync.
Right-click on the HotSync icon in your computer’s icon tray in the lower left corner
of the screen, and choose Setup.
3. Select the Local tab and look at the setting specified for the Serial Port. You will
need this information in subsequent steps.
4. Click OK to close the window.
5. Shut down HotSync manager on the computer. Right-click on the HotSync icon in
your computer’s icon tray and select Exit.
6. On your computer, run HyperTerminal, which displays in the Accessories directory
in the Windows Programs menu.
7. Start a new connection in HyperTerminal.
8. Set the HyperTerminal session to connect directly, and specify the communications
port determined in Step 3.
9. Adjust the communications parameters in HyperTerminal and on the terminal so
they are compatible (e.g., 57,600, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity).
10. On the terminal, click the Send Msg button to send a test message string from the
terminal to HyperTerminal on the computer. You can edit the message, and can
also select the Continuous check box to send the test message multiple times.
When the serial port is functioning properly, the messages sent from the terminal
are displayed in HyperTerminal.
20-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Digitizer Alignment Test
The Digitizer Alignment option tests the tracking of the stylus on the screen. To run this test,
tap the stylus in various places on the screen and crosshairs appear under the stylus. You
may also move the stylus continuously across the screen and the crosshairs track the
movement of the stylus.
System Diagnostics Test
The System Diagnostics option is an interactive test of all the terminal’s system features.
This test prompts you to perform different actions and listen for different sounds. The output
of the system diagnostics is a log file.
To run system diagnostics tap the Start button. You are prompted to begin. Tap OK to start
the test.
The test prompts you to press the different buttons on the terminal. Pressing the specified
button results in a series of short high-pitched sounds, denoting proper functioning.
Pressing an incorrect button or having the system timeout results in a low tone, denoting
failure.
The test then produces a series of four tones to test the speakers and prompts you, asking
whether or not you heard all the tones. If you hear all four tones, answer Yes. If you don’t
hear all the tones, answer No.
The test also prompts you to scan a bar code with the scanner. Press the OK button and
then scan an item.
System Diagnostics also performs some tests which are not interactive. It reads the system
information, tests the serial port, tests the memory, and tests the timer.
A series of tones denotes the conclusion of the test.
At this point, view the log file by tapping on View Log. This brings up the multi-page test
results log. You can scroll through the log, one page at a time, by tapping on the arrow
buttons in the lower left-hand corner of the screen. Alternately, use the scroll bar on the
right-hand side of the screen.
20-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Help With Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Troubleshooting
If you encounter a problem with your SPT 1700 terminal, look in this section for the
description that most closely matches the symptoms you observe and try the suggestions
listed.
Important: For troubleshooting tips not included in this handbook, refer to either the
README.TXT file or the Help Notes file located in the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop
directory. These files are also on the installation CD-ROM.
Problem
Installation
Cause(s)
Solution
Symbol Palm Terminal
Desktop installation
program incorrectly
detects that a modem
is attached to one of
your serial ports.
Do not place your SPT 1700
terminal in the cradle while
installing the software.
Serial Cradle
LEDs do not light when Cradle is not receiving power.
the cradle is plugged
in.
Make sure the power supply is
securely connected and receiving
power.
LED does not light
when the terminal is
inserted.
Terminal is not seated firmly in
the cradle.
Replace the terminal in the cradle.
Attempt by the cradle Terminal was removed from the Replace the terminal in the cradle.
to HotSync the
terminal failed.
cradle while the LED was
blinking green.
This allows the cradle to attempt
another HotSync.
Terminal’s battery is dead.
Recharge the battery.
Active Error dialog box on
terminal.
Error dialog box must be cleared in
the terminal. Tap the OK button on
the terminal’s touchscreen.
20-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Problem
Ethernet Cradle
The unit locks up with The unit could not configure
Cause(s)
Solution
Hook the unit up to an Ethernet
its ID addresses.
addresses.
General Issues
SPT 1700 terminal
does not turn on.
Adjust the contrast control.
Make sure the battery is charged
and installed properly.
Recharge the battery. If your SPT
1700 terminal still does not
operate, try a soft reset; refer to
Resetting Your SPT 1700 Terminal
on page 21-5 for details.
Low battery warning
after recharging the
batteries.
The battery warning message
may display immediately after
recharging the battery. In
This is normal. It takes a few
minutes for the battery gauge to
accurately show the condition of
addition, if you check the battery the battery.
gauge in the Applications
Launcher immediately after
recharging thebattery, thegauge
may start at “empty” and slowly
rise to “full.”
No sound.
not be set correctly in the
General Preferences screen.
be no sound. Refer to General
Preferences on page 14-10 for
more information.
No sound upon good
decode.
The System Sound option may Verify that Beep on Good Decode
not be set correctly in the
is set (checked) in Hardware Setup
in the Scan Demo Application.
Refer to General Preferences on
page 14-10 for more information.
General Preferences screen.
SPT 1700 terminal
turns itself off.
Your SPT 1700 terminal is
designed to turn itself off after a the General Preferences screen,
Check the “Auto-off after” setting in
period of inactivity. This period
can be set at one minute, two
minutes or three minutes.
and change the setting if you need
a longer delay before the automatic
shutoff feature activates. Refer to
General Preferences on page 14-
10 for more information.
20-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Help With Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Problem
Cause(s)
You need to use the Graffiti
Solution
SPT 1700 terminal
doesn’t recognize my character strokes for your SPT
handwriting.
Refer to Writing Graffiti with the
Stylus on page 3-6 for information
about how to write Graffiti
1700 terminal to recognize
handwriting input with the stylus. character strokes.
You are making the Graffiti
Make the Graffiti character strokes
character strokes in the display in the Graffiti writing area.
part of the screen, not on the
Graffiti writing area.
You are writing the strokes for
Write the strokes on the proper
letters in the left-hand side, and side of the Graffiti writing area.
the strokes for numbers in the
right-hand side of the Graffiti
writing area.
Tapping the screen
buttons or icons does recalibrated.
not activate the
The digitizer may need to be
Recalibrate the digitizer. Choose
Digitizer from the Preferences
application pick list and follow the
directions on the screen.
corresponding feature.
When I tap the
icon, nothing happens. have menus.
Not all applications or screens
Try changing to a different
application.
A message displays
You may have too many unused Delete unused memos and
stating that your SPT records.
1700 terminal memory
is full.
records. If necessary, you can save
these records on your computer
using the Save Backup Copy
option that displays in the Delete
screens.
Beamed data does not The terminals may be too far
Confirm that the SPT 1700
transmit.
apart.
terminals are 1 ft. apart or less, and
that the path between the two
devices is clear of obstacles.
When receiving
beamed data an out of at least twice the amount of
Your SPT 1700 terminal requires Verify the amount of free memory
available.
memory message
displays.
memory available as the data
you are receiving. For example,
if you are receiving a 30K
application, you must have at
least 60K free.
20-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Problem
Cause(s)
Solution
Applications
Tapping the Today
button doesn’t display set to the current date.
the current date.
Your SPT 1700 terminal is not
Make sure the Set Date box in the
General Preferences screen
displays the current date. Refer to
General Preferences on page 14-
10 for more information.
Entries seem to be
missing in various
applications.
The categories pick list is set for Check the Categories pick list
a specific category.
(upper-right corner of the screen).
Choose All to display all of the
records for the application.
Security may have been set for Check the Security application and
certain records.
make sure that the Private Records
setting is set to Show private
records.
HotSync Operations
A Local HotSync
operation does not
complete successfully.
HotSync Manager is not
running.
If HotSync Manager is running, exit
and restart it.
Make sure you selected Local from
the HotSync Manager menu or the
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop
menu.
Check the cable connection
between the SPT 1700 terminal or
cradle and the serial port on your
computer.
Try a lower baud rate setting on the
Local tab in the Setup screen.
Make sure you are not running
another program — such as
America On-line, CompuServe or
WinFax — that uses the serial port
you selected in the Setup screen.
Read the HotSync Log for the user
account for which you are
performing a HotSync operation.
20-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Help With Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Problem
Cause(s)
Solution
A Modem HotSync
operation does not
complete successfully.
Your modem doesn't have an
auto-off feature enabled.
Make sure your modem is on, and
that it does not shut down
automatically as part of an energy-
saving feature.
The Setup String in the Setup
You may need to select a different
screen configures your modem Modem Type or enter a custom
incorrectly. Confirm that the
Speed setting in the Setup
screen is appropriate for your
modem.
Setup String. Most modems have a
Setup String that causes them to
send initial connection sounds to a
speaker. You can use these
sounds to check the modem
connection.
Make sure the modem connected
to your computer is turned on and
is connected to the outgoing phone
line.
Make sure you selected Modem
from the HotSync Manager menu.
Security
I forgot the password
(SPT 1700 terminal is
not locked).
You can use the Security
application to delete the password.
If you do this, your SPT 1700
as Private. However, you can
perform a HotSync operation
before you delete the password:
the HotSync process backs up all
entries, whether or not they are
or Deleting a Password on page
15-7 for details.
I forgot the password
(SPT 1700 terminal is
locked).
If you assign a password and lock
your SPT 1700 terminal, perform a
hard reset to continue using your
SPT 1700 terminal. Refer to
Resetting Your SPT 1700 Terminal
on page 21-5 for details.
20-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Memo Pad Tips
If you cannot manually arrange the order of the memos in the List screen, check the Memo
Preferences setting. Make sure that Sort by is set to Manual.
If you choose to view your memos alphabetically on Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop and
then perform a HotSync operation, the memos on your SPT 1700 terminal still appear in
the order defined in the Memo Preferences setting. In other words, the sort settings that
you use with Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop are not transferred to your SPT 1700 terminal.
Date Book Tips
In the Week View, you cannot select overlapping events that have the same start time. If
you have two or more events with the same start time, choose the Day View for the
particular day to see the overlapping events.
20-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Help With Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Technical Support, Service and Repair
If you have a problem using your SPT 1700 terminal, make sure you have reviewed the
following:
•
•
The Troubleshooting section earlier in this chapter
The README file and Help Notes located in the folder where you installed the
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software on your computer (or on your installation
CD)
•
The Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software Online Help.
For further assistance, contact your regional technical support office by e-mail, phone or
fax. Before requesting support, experiment a bit to reproduce and isolate the problem.
When you do contact support, be ready to provide the following information:
•
•
•
The version of Windows you are using
The actual error message or state you are experiencing
The steps you take to reproduce the problem.
Technical Support
United States and Canada
Phone:1-800-659-2240
Web site:http:/ / www.symbol.com/ palm
Outside North America, contact your local Symbol representative. Refer to page xix for the
Technical Support number in your country.
20-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
20-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 21
Chapter Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Caring for Your SPT 1700 Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Battery Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Resetting Your SPT 1700 Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
Performing a Soft Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
Performing a Hard Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
21-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
21-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Introduction
This chapter provides information to help you take proper care of your SPT 1700 terminal
and prolong battery life. It also discusses how to reset your SPT 1700 terminal.
Caring for Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Your SPT 1700 terminal is designed to be reliable and to provide years of trouble-free
service. However, you should observe the following tips when using your SPT 1700
terminal:
•
Take care not to scratch the screen of your SPT 1700. When working with your SPT
1700, use the supplied stylus or plastic-tipped pens intended for use with a touch-
sensitive screen. Never use an actual pen, pencil or other sharp metallic object on
the surface of the SPT 1700 screen.
•
Although your SPT 1700 is water and dust resistant, it should not be exposed to
rain or moisture for an extended period of time. In general, treat your SPT 1700 as
you would a pocket calculator or other small electronic instrument.
•
•
The touch-sensitive screen of your SPT 1700 contains a glass element. Take care
not to drop your SPT 1700 or subject it to any strong impact.
Protect your SPT 1700 from temperature extremes. Do not leave your SPT 1700
on the dashboard of a car on a hot day, and keep it away from heaters and other
heat sources.
•
•
Do not store or use your SPT 1700 in any location that is extremely dusty, damp or
wet.
Use a soft lens cloth to clean your SPT 1700. If the surface of the SPT 1700 screen
becomes soiled, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with diluted isopropyl alcohol
(rubbing alcohol).
Battery Considerations
Please note the following considerations when charging the battery in your SPT 1700
terminal:
•
Under normal conditions, your SPT 1700 terminal battery should provide
approximately 8 hours of use before the battery requires recharge. You can
conserve battery life by minimizing the use of the backlight feature, and selecting
the “Auto-off after” setting that automatically turns the SPT 1700 terminal off after
a period of inactivity (Refer to General Preferences on page 14-10).
21-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Note:When the scanner is in use, battery life is shorter, and depends on
the number of scans performed per minute.
•
•
If the battery becomes low while using the scanner application, the scanner
application de-activates, and you receive the message, “Battery low error”. The
other functions still work until another low battery alert occurs. When the scanner
de-activates, perform a HotSync synchronization to back up your data before
charging the battery to prevent data loss. If you try to scan when your battery is low,
you receive the message, “Your battery is too low for scanning”. When you receive
this message, recharge your battery and attempt scanning again.
Similarly, if the battery becomes low in the course of normal use, an alert displays
on the terminal screen describing the low battery condition. The message you
receive is, “Your batteries are low. Place the handheld in a hotsync cradle to
recharge”. If this alert displays, perform a HotSync synchronization to back up your
data before you charge the battery. As the battery life becomes extremely low, you
receive the message, “Your batteries are extremely low. Place the handheld in a
hotsync cradle to recharge”.
•
•
•
•
If you remove the battery, the built-in backup power of your SPT 1700 terminal
maintains memory data for a period of up to 2 minutes. Whenever you remove
the battery, replace it with a fully charged spare battery immediately. If you
encounter any difficulties in the course of battery replacement, reinstall the original
battery and wait a few minutes for the backup power to recharge.
If the battery drains to the point where your SPT 1700 terminal does not operate, it
residual energy in the battery to store the data, but not enough to turn on your SPT
1700 terminal. If your SPT 1700 terminal does not turn on when you press the red
power button, charge the battery immediately.
If you leave a drained battery in your SPT 1700 terminal for an extended period of
time, you can lose all of the stored data. If this happens, replace the battery and
use the reset button to reset your SPT 1700 terminal. (Refer to Resetting Your SPT
1700 Terminal on page 21-5.) After you reset your SPT 1700 terminal, perform a
HotSync operation to restore the data from your computer.
If your battery becomes low while the terminal is still associated with a WAN, the
terminal disconnects from the network. Recharge the battery using the cradle or
the synchronization/charging cable, then reassociate with the network.
21-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Resetting Your SPT 1700 Terminal
Under normal circumstances, you will never have to use the reset button. However, on rare
occasions your SPT 1700 terminal may “hang” (no longer respond to buttons or the
screen). In this case, perform a reset to get your SPT 1700 terminal running again.
Performing a Soft Reset
A soft reset tells your SPT 1700 terminal to stop what it’s doing and start over again. All
records and entries stored in your SPT 1700 terminal are retained with a soft reset. After a
soft reset, the Palm Computing Platform Logo screen displays followed by the General
Preferences screen.
To perform a soft reset, remove the battery cover and use your stylus to gently press the
reset button, which is located under the battery cover.
Reset button
Performing a Hard Reset
A hard reset tells your SPT 1700 terminal to start over again and erase all records and
entries stored in your SPT 1700 terminal. Therefore, never perform a hard reset unless a
soft reset does not solve your problem.
Note:You can restore any data previously synchronized with your
computer during the next HotSync operation.
21-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
To perform a hard reset:
1. Open and remove the battery cover.
2. Hold down the power button on the front of the SPT 1700 terminal.
3. While holding down the power button, use the tip of the stylus to gently press the
reset button on the back of the terminal.
4. Release the reset button.
5. Release the power button.
6. When a message displays on the SPT 1700 terminal screen warning that you are
about to erase all the data stored on your SPT 1700 terminal, do one of the
following:
•
Press the upper half of either of the scroll buttons on the front panel of the SPT
1700 terminal to complete the hard reset and display the Digitizer screen.
•
Press any other button to perform a soft reset.
Note:With a hard reset, the current date and time are retained. Formats
Preferences and other settings are restored to their factory default
settings.
21-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
Using Expense Templates
and Custom Expense Reports
Introduction
This appendix provides illustrations of the four expense templates that come with the
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop software and describes how to use or modify any of these
templates when creating expense reports with data from the Expense application. It also
provides information about creating your own custom expense report templates for use with
Expense.
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Expense Templates and Custom Expense Reports
Sample 4
Modifying and Creating Expense Templates
This section assumes that you are familiar with Microsoft Excel or a similar spreadsheet
application. If you are not familiar with Microsoft Excel, consult your company’s Information
Services department or an experienced user.
About Mapping Tables
Before creating or modifying an Expense template, it’s important to understand the function
of Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop’s Expense application. In simple terms, the Expense
application is designed to move Expense data from your SPT 1700 terminal into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet.
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
Each Expense item stored in your SPT 1700 terminal represents a group of related data.
The following data can be associated with an expense item:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Category
Payment Currency
Date
Vendor
Expense Type
City
Amount
Attendees
Payment Method
Note.
When you perform a HotSync operation between your SPT 1700 terminal and the Symbol
Palm Terminal Desktop on your computer, the Expense data is stored on your computer in
the Expense.txt file. When you open the Expense application in Symbol Palm Terminal
Desktop, an Excel macro populates an expense template with your data based on the rules
specified in a spreadsheet file named Maptable.xls.
The Maptable.xls file is an editable spreadsheet that functions as a “mapping table”, which
guides the Excel macro in extracting the Expense data. The mapping table tells the Excel
macro how large the spreadsheet is and provides the data-cell layout of the Excel template
used for the Expense Report.
Customizing Existing Sample Templates
Four sample Expense Report templates have been provided and are stored in the
Templates folder (which is in the same folder as the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop
application).
If the layout of one (or more) of these templates is appropriate for your reporting needs, you
can easily customize the templates with your company name and other information.
To customize a sample Expense Report template:
1. Make a backup copy of the contents of the Templates folder.
2. Open the sample template you want to modify to open it in Microsoft Excel.
3. Make the changes you require.
A-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Expense Templates and Custom Expense Reports
Important: Do not insert rows or columns in the sample template. Doing so
changes the way your Expense data maps to the template and causes errors. If
you want to move the cells to a different location or add or delete rows or columns,
make changes to the Maptable.xls file.
You can insert your own company logo without changing the Maptable.xls file.
However, if you change the file name, you must make a corresponding change in
the Maptable.xls file.
You can also rename cells without changing the Maptable.xls file — provided that
the expense type corresponds to your SPT 1700 terminal data. For example, you
can change “Snack” to “Munchies” — then all items entered on your SPT 1700
terminal as “Snack” maps to the cell(s) labeled “Munchies.”
4. Choose Save As from the File menu and save it as a template (*.xlt) file.
5. Navigate to the Templates folder (in the Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop directory).
Note:If you do not need to change the Maptable.xls file, save the template
file with its original file name (e.g., Sample2.xlt). If you do need to
change the Maptable.xls file, give your modified template a unique
name. Be sure to use the.xlt file suffix, which defines the file as a
6. Click the Save button to save your modified template.
Note:If you need to modify the Maptable.xls file, you must do this before
you can use the modified template with your Expense data. To
modify the Maptable.xls file for your new template, refer to
Programming the Mapping Table on page A-9. Read all of the
sections of this appendix before making changes to the Maptable.xls
file.
Determining the Layout of the Expense Report
This section describes the layout considerations for the Expense Report and explains the
terms used for creating the report.
Labels
There are two kinds of labels you need to define for your report: day/date and expense type.
Each type of label can be either Fixed or Variable. A Fixed label means that the label always
A-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
displays as a header at the beginning of a row or column. A variable label means the
location of the header can vary.
For example, a list table of expenses could have variable labels in the rows for day/date,
and variable labels in the columns for expense type. In this case, neither day/date or
expense type information would be “fixed” (as a header). Instead, the date and expense
type information would be filled into the cells of the spreadsheet as appropriate.
Examples of both Fixed and Variable labels display in the sample expense templates,
which were discussed previously in this appendix.
Sections
A Section is an area of the report that has common formatting. It is common for an Expense
report to have more than one Section. For example, the following sample Expense Report
(Sample3.xlt) contains several Sections.
Section 1
(not prepaid)
Section 2
(prepaid)
Section 3
Because your Expense data maps to row and column areas of your final report, different
Sections require different definitions for the data mapping. To create additional Sections
with different mapping, create corresponding additional lines to the mapping table file,
Maptable.xls. Refer to Programming the Mapping Table on page A-9 for details.
A-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Expense Templates and Custom Expense Reports
If a Section contains cells for prepaid (company paid) expenses, create an additional line
in the mapping table for “prepaid.” This will count as an additional Section in the mapping
table. The only data that differs in the prepaid Section (from the non-prepaid Section) is the
row/column numbers for the expense type.
Using Your Custom Expense Report
If you already have a custom Excel expense report, you can use it with a modified mapping
table. However, before you can create a Maptable.xls file that corresponds to your custom
Expense Report, you must first analyze the characteristics of your report.
Perform the following before you begin a custom mapping table:
•
Print a copy of your custom expense report. Activate the Row and Column
Headings option in the Sheet settings of the Page Setup command. This enables
you to quickly determine the size of the Section(s), as well as the numbers for the
start rows and columns.
•
On the printed copy, identify the data Sections. A Section is an area of data with
common row and column formatting. A yellow high lighter marking pen can make
it easy to see the Sections as you work with programming the mapping table. Your
custom Expense Report can contain any number of Sections, and the same data
can be repeated in any Section.
•
•
On the printed copy, identify the type of Labels that apply to each Section. Each
Section can have only one kind of Fixed or Variable Label for rows and each
Section can have only one kind for columns.
Place a copy of your custom Expense Report in the Templates folder (in the
Symbol Palm Terminal Desktop directory). Change the file name so it has the file
extension.xlt (which defines it as a Microsoft Excel Template). Make a note of the
exact file name so it can be defined in the mapping table file.
Programming the Mapping Table
Once you have analyzed the components of your custom Expense Report, you can
program the mapping table to fill the report with data from the SPT 1700 terminal.
A-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
To program a new custom mapping table:
1. Open a copy of the Maptable.xls file in Microsoft Excel.
Note:This file is located in the same folder as the Symbol Palm Terminal
Desktop application. Make a backup copy of this file before you
make your modifications.
2. To map a new template, scroll to the original template that you chose for your
modifications (the name of the template displays in column B of the Maptable.xls
file, next to the cell highlighted in green that reads “Template Name:”). If you did not
modify an existing template, move to any table in the Maptable.xls file.
3. Select all the rows associated with the template name and copy and paste them
into a blank area of the Maptable.xls file (below the rows used for Sample4.xlt), and
click on a row number to select a blank row.
All rows
associated
with
template are
selected
A copy of the rows is pasted into the Maptable.xls file.
4. Name the table.
A-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Expense Templates and Custom Expense Reports
In the cell immediately to the right of the cell entitled Template Name, enter the
exact file name of your custom Expense Report template.
5. Define the number of Sections. Each row in a table defines how your SPT 1700
terminal data is placed in a Section of your custom Expense Report. Note that the
prepaid portion of a Section has its own row and counts as a separate Section for
map table purposes, even though it is not a separate Section in your template.
Table with
four sections
You may add or delete rows as necessary so that the total number of rows
corresponds to the number of Sections in your custom Expense Report. To clear
all of the existing settings in a row, click to select the row and press Ctrl+Delete.
6. Name each row to correspond to a Section of your custom Expense Report.
7. Determine the Label settings. The orientation of the data fields (Row, Column)
displays in the yellow Section of the table.
Determine whether the Rows will contain expense or date information, and
whether a row is Fixed or Variable. You can place only one “x” in the Row Section
(columns 2–5).
Determine whether the Columns will contain expense or date information, and
whether a label is Fixed or Variable. You can place only one “x” in the Column
Section (columns 6–9).
8. Define the dimensions of the Section. The dimensions of the Section display in the
green columns (10–13).
A-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
# of Rows
Represents the total number of rows in the Section,
excluding any header or total rows. This includes only the
number of rows in the Section where your SPT 1700
terminal data will be placed.
# of Columns Represents the total number of columns in the Section,
excluding any header or total columns. This includes only
the number of columns in the Section where your SPT
1700 terminal data will be placed.
Start Row
The number of the first row of the Section that will be filled
with your SPT 1700 terminal data.
Start Column The number of the first column of the Section that will be
filled with your SPT 1700 terminal data.
9. Define the Dates and Intervals. The dates and intervals between dates display in
the light blue columns (14–17).
Date
The row or column number where all the date information
will be placed
Dates
the number of blank columns (or rows) separating the date
fields. If there are no blank columns (or rows) between
date entries, leave this number set to zero
Start Day
Day
the day of the week that starts the expense reporting
period. Enter a three-character abbreviation for the day
(e.g., Sun, Mon, Tue).
the row or column number where all the day information
will be placed. If the dates are in a row, enter the row
number. If the dates are in a column, enter the column
number
10. Define whether the Section is in list format. This setting displays in the light purple
columns (18–19).
A-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Expense Templates and Custom Expense Reports
The following diagram shows data presented in a list format:
If your Section is in list format, enter “Yes” under list format and enter the number
of the row or column where the expense description will be placed in the Expense
Type cell. Expense amounts can be entered in several different columns or rows if
required by your template.
Note:Expense type labels must all display in the same column.
11. Enter the row or column numbers for the expense types that appear in the Section.
These settings display in the aqua columns (20–48).
For these settings, simply enter the row or column number for the expense types
that you want to display in the Section. Note that the same row or column number
can be used more than once. An example of this would be meals that encompass
breakfast, lunch, dinner and snacks. In the previous example, all expense items
would be populated into row/column 4 of the custom Expense Report.
12. Complete the table. The remaining columns (49–57) in the table are used to define
the column or row number that corresponds to the description.
13. Mark a Section for prepaid expenses (yellow column). If a row in the map table is
for prepaid (company paid) expenses, type a “yes” in the cell on that Section’s row.
Type “no” in all the cells of this column that do not pertain to prepaid expenses.
14. Repeat steps 7 through 12 for each Section that you have defined for your custom
Expense Report.
A-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
15. The Map Expense Report Options dialog (magenta section) has five fields where
you can specify the row and column on your template where header information
will be mapped.
Because header data is not related to any particular Section, you have to fill in only
one row. If the item does not display on your template, leave these cells blank.
Using Applications Other Than Microsoft Excel
You can use applications other than Microsoft Excel (such as Lotus 1-2-3 or Quattro Pro)
to open and manipulate the Expense data on your computer. The data file is named
“Expense.txt,” and is stored in the Expense folder, within the folder containing the SPT 1700
terminal user data.
Expense data in the Expense.txt file is in tab-delimited format.
Expense File Details
The Expense.txt file contains four groups of data. It is easier to see these four groups if you
open the file with a spreadsheet application.
Trips
Shows the number of Expense application categories, and
lists each one followed by an “end” statement.
Currency
Shows how many currencies were used for the Expense
data, and lists the countries that correspond to that
currency.
Trip
Shows the number of expenses by category, and lists the
expenses for each category.
Expenses
Shows the total number of expenses, and lists them
chronologically.
A-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Non-ASCII Characters for Login Scripts
Introduction
The following information enables you to create custom login scripts that require non-ASCII
characters. It is provided for advanced users who understand the use and requirements of
such characters in a custom login script.
Use of ^char
You may use the caret ( ^ ) to transmit ASCII command characters. If you send ^char, and
the ASCII value of char is between @ and _, then the character is automatically translated
to a single-byte value between 0 and 31. For example, ^M is converted to a carriage return.
If char is a value between a and z, the character sequence is translated to a single-byte
value between 1 and 26. If char is any other value, the character sequence is not subject
to any special processing.
For example, the string “Joe^M” transmits Joe, followed by a carriage return.
Carriage Return and Line Feed
You may include carriage return and line feed commands as part of the login script, when
entered in the following format:
<cr>Sends or receives a carriage return
<lf>Sends or receives a line feed
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
For example, the string “waitfor Joe<cr><lf>” waits to receive Joe followed by a carriage
return and line feed from the remote computer before executing the next command in the
script.
Literal Characters
The backslash ( \ ) character defines that the next character is transmitted as a literal
character, and is not subject to any special processing ordinarily associated with that
character.
Examples:
\^Includes a caret as part of the string
\<Includes a < as part of the string
\\Includes a backslash as part of the string
B-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working in Week View . . . . . . . . 7-13
A
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Address Book
beaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
creating entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
lookup entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Alarm
Applications
AvantGo Client
Currency Pick List . . . . 8-8
Transferring data to
Mobile Link menu commands . . 11-21
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1, 6-3
menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
special buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Date Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -xv, 7-1, 7-3
agenda view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Changing the View . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Microsoft Excel . . . . . . 8-10
using expense report templates 8-14
expense
Lotus 1-2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
font style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
GsmDemo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Index-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
synchronizing with email . . . . . . 12-5
viewing messages . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Memo Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3
Arranging Memos . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
choosing a memo category . . . . 13-6
Deleting a Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
marking a memo private . . . . . . 13-6
SScan Application
To Do Show Options . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
AvantGo Client
Using the Forms Manager . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Using with a modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
B
Batteries
auto-off delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
battery considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Index-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beaming
Address Book categories . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
business card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Business Card
Scheduling Repeating Events . . . . . . 7-10
Working in Week View . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Demo Scan Application
beaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
C
Calculator
buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
menu commands
Calculator Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Categories
beaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Changing the Date Book View . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Changing the Expense Item Date . . . . . . . . 8-5
Conducting a HotSync Operation
via Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Conducting a local HotSync Operation . . . . 9-9
Creating
Entering Receipt Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Entries
Ethernet Cradle
Ethernet cradle
Customizing HotSync Application Settings 9-12
D
Date Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Deleting an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
event conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
event duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
event start time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Marking Private Event . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
month view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Date Book scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
in week view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
private . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
setting alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
start and duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
untimed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Index-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Expense
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
preparing your computer for modem . 9-14
user profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
using a modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
using File Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Menu Commands
expense templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
F
File
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
File Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Finding
Finding information with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
G
Keyboard
Getting Help with your SPT 1700 Terminal 20-1
Graffiti Help
Laser Pointer Application
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20, 2-25, 9-21, 14-3
H
conducting wireless operations . . . . . 9-18
conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
customizing application settings . . . . 9-12
Ethernet cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
installing NetSync . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
File Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Mail
adding a signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
address lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
creating messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
full header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
graffiti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
HotSync options . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4, 12-21
opening on SPT 1700 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Index-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
sending messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
creating new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Menus
Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
messages
Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Mobile Link
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
HotSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Month
Palm Desktop
system requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Phone Numbers
Power Off
Preferences
Preparing for a Modem
HotSync Operation . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
N
Network
Q
password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Configuring CDPD WAN . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Configuring GSM WAN . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Configuring Spectrum24 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
New
Records
Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
beaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Removing
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
Date Book events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Repeat Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Address Book entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Non-ASCII Characters for Login Scripts . . . B-1
notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -xvii
Index-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPT 1700 Series Product Reference Guide
reset
online tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
soft reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
SPT 1700 terminal
S
Barcode Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Scout Sync Client
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
22
TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
alarm setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Using Mobile Link on your terminal . . . . . 11-18
Sorting
Spectrum24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
SPT 1700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
Bar Code Scanner test . . . . . . . 20-6
Digitizer Alignment test . . . . . . . 20-8
Serial Port test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
system information test . . . . . . . 20-5
Systems Diagnostics test . . . . . . 20-8
W
Wireless HotSync Operations . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Working in Agenda View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Working in Month View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Working in Week View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Working with Your SPT 1700 Terminal . . . . 3-1
Index-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tell Us What You Think...
We’d like to know what you think about this Manual. Please take a moment
to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form to: (631) 738-3318, or mail to:
Symbol Technologies, Inc.
One Symbol Plaza M/S B-4
Holtsville, NY 11742-1300
Attention: Technical Publications Manager
IMPORTANT: If you need product support, please call the appropriate
customer support number provided. Unfortunately, we cannot provide
customer support at the fax number above.
User’s Manual Title:___________________________________________
(please include revision level)
How familiar were you with this product before using this manual?
Very familiar
Slightly familiar
Not at all familiar
Did this manual meet your needs? If not, please explain.
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
What topics need to be added to the index, if applicable?
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
What topics do you feel need to be better discussed? Please be specific.
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
What can we do to further improve our manuals?
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|